You are on page 1of 204

OPERATION

MANUAL
HVS-1000HS
Digital Video Switcher

HVS-1000EOU
Hanabi Operation Unit

2nd Edition-Rev.4
Precautions
Important Safety Warnings

[Power]

Operate unit only on the specified supply voltage.


Caution

Disconnect power cord by connector only. Do not pull on cable portion.

Do not place or drop heavy or sharp-edged objects on power cord. A damaged cord
can cause fire or electrical shock hazards. Regularly check power cord for
Stop excessive wear or damage to avoid possible fire / electrical hazards.

[Grounding]

Ensure unit is properly grounded at all times to prevent electrical shock hazard.
Caution

Do not ground the unit to gas lines, units, or fixtures of an explosive or dangerous
nature.
Hazard

[Operation]

Do not operate unit in hazardous or potentially explosive atmospheres. Doing so


could result in fire, explosion, or other dangerous results.
Hazard

Do not allow liquids, metal pieces, or other foreign materials to enter the unit. Doing
so could result in fire, other hazards, or unit malfunction.
Hazard

If foreign material does enter the unit, turn power off and disconnect power cord
immediately. Remove material and contact authorized service representative if
damage has occurred.
[Circuitry Access]
Do not remove covers, panels, casing, or access circuitry with power applied to the
unit! Turn power off and disconnect power cord prior to removal. Internal servicing /
adjustment of unit should only be performed by qualified personnel.

Do not touch any parts / circuitry with a high heat factor.


Capacitors can retain enough electric charge to cause mild to serious shock, even
after power is disconnected. Capacitors associated with the power supply are
Stop especially hazardous. Avoid contact with any capacitors.

Unit should not be operated or stored with cover, panels, and / or casing removed.
Operating unit with circuitry exposed could result in electric shock / fire hazards or
Hazard unit malfunction.

[Potential Hazards]
If abnormal smells or noises are noticed coming from the unit, turn power off
immediately and disconnect power cord to avoid potentially hazardous conditions. If
problems similar to above occur, contact authorized service representative before
Caution attempting to again operate unit.

[Fuse]
If this product is equipped with a fuse, fuse replacement should only be performed
by qualified personnel. Power off equipment and disconnect power cord prior to
Caution replacement. Replace only with fuse of same type, voltage rating, and current rating
as specified for the unit.

[Backup Battery]
If this product contains a memory backup battery (either dry cell or rechargeable)
and when it is necessary to replace the battery, have work done by the shop where
Caution you purchased the product.
Upon Receipt
Unpacking
The HVS-1000HS and any of its options you may have purchased are fully inspected and
adjusted prior to shipment and can be operated immediately upon completing all required
connections and operational settings. Check your received items against the packing lists
below.
MU Box Contents
ITEM QTY REMARKS
HVS-1000HS MU 1 HVS-1000 Series main processing unit
AC Cord 1 For AC power connection
Rack Mount Brackets 1 pr. Rack mounting to EIA standard type
OU Box Contents
HVS-1000EOU 1 HVS-1000 Series Operation Unit for Editing
Control Cable 1 For connection between MU and OU, 10m (PC-3108)
AC Cord 1 For AC power connection
Memory Card 1 Compact Flash memory card
Operation Manual 1
Internal Options
HVS-1000HSDI 1-2 For addition of 4 signal inputs (max 2 cards)
HVS-1000HSCR 1 For addition of 4 signal inputs + UTL-IN
HVS-1000HSDO 1 For addition of 3 signal outputs
HVS-KEYER (*1) 1-2 For addition of a keyer (max 2 cards)
HVS-KYCC (*1) 1-2 For addition of a keyer with color corrector (max 2 cards)
DVE-1000HS (*2) 1 Standard DVE unit (HD/SD switchable)
DVE-1000HSA (*2) 1 Advanced DVE unit (HD/SD switchable)
HVS-ARCNET 1 ARCNET board
HVS-1000PSM 1 Modular redundant power supply for MU
HVS-1000PSO 1 Modular redundant power supply for OU
External Options
For addition of auxiliary controls
HVS-AUX16 (*3) 1-10
(common use with HVS-3100/3000H/S)
For HVS-AUX16 remote connection use
HVS-AUXRK 1
(common use with HVS-3100/3000H/S)
For tally signal use (relay type),
HVS-TALR20/32 (*4) 1-5
(common use with HVS-3100/3000H/S)
For tally signal use (open collector type),
HVS-TALOC20/32 (*4) 1-5
(common use with HVS-3100/3000H/S)
BNC cable 1 For Arcnet connection, 10m (5C2V 75ohm)
Memory Card 1 Compact Flash memory card
(*1) Up to two HVS-KEYER or HVS-KYCC optional boards can be installed to the MU. HVS-1000CC
(software option) is necessary for HVS-KYCC.
(*2) Either DVE-1000HS or DVE-1000HSA can be installed to the MU. (Both not available.)
(*3) HVS-ARCNET optional board is necessary for HVS-AUX16 use.
(*4) A multiple Tally unit configuration possible; up to 5 units max.
Each optional device (except factory installed ones) included the specific operation or installation manuals.
Check
Check to ensure no damage has occurred during shipment. If damage has occurred, or items
are missing, inform your supplier immediately.

Rack Mounting
The HVS-1000HS can be mounted to EIA standard rack units. When rack mounting a unit,
remove the rubber feet and use the accessory rack mount brackets (rack ears).
Table of Contents

1. Prior to Starting ...........................................................................................................................1


1-1. Welcome .............................................................................................................................1
1-2. About HVS-1000 Series Switchers......................................................................................1
1-3. About This Manual ..............................................................................................................2

2. Panel Description........................................................................................................................3
2-1. Operation Unit.....................................................................................................................3
2-1-1. Operation Panel ..........................................................................................................3
2-1-2. Rear Panel..................................................................................................................4
2-2. Main Unit.............................................................................................................................5
2-2-1. Front Panel .................................................................................................................5
2-2-2. Rear Panel..................................................................................................................6
2-2-3. Interfaces ....................................................................................................................7
2-2-4. MU Rear Panel Cards............................................................................................... 11

3. Connection................................................................................................................................12
3-1. Basic Connection ..............................................................................................................12
3-2. Optional Configuration ......................................................................................................13
3-3. Aspect/Format Selection ...................................................................................................14

4. Menu Operations ......................................................................................................................15


4-1. Menu Control Sections......................................................................................................15
4-2. Making Settings ................................................................................................................15
4-2-1. Selecting Needed Menu............................................................................................15
4-2-2. Changing Parameter Values .....................................................................................17
4-2-3. Confirmation Needed Parameters.............................................................................17
4-2-4. Keypad Input.............................................................................................................18
4-2-5. Joystick Input ............................................................................................................19
4-2-6. ON/OFF Button .........................................................................................................19
4-3. Menu Display Descriptions ...............................................................................................20
4-3-1. Menu Select Section .................................................................................................20
4-3-2. Menu Access Shortcuts ............................................................................................21
4-3-3. User Buttons .............................................................................................................22
4-4. Returning to Default ..........................................................................................................24
4-4-1. Returning Each Parameter to Default .......................................................................24
4-4-2. Returning Menus to Default ......................................................................................24
4-4-3. Returning to User Default .........................................................................................25

5. Selecting Input Signals .............................................................................................................26


5-1. Bus Button Indications ......................................................................................................26
5-1-1. Color Indication .........................................................................................................26
5-1-2. Flip-Flop....................................................................................................................26
5-2. MATT ................................................................................................................................27
5-3. Input Signals .....................................................................................................................29
5-3-1. Signal Name .............................................................................................................29
5-3-2. Selecting M/E Bus Signals........................................................................................30
5-3-3. Bus Signal Assignment and Inhibit Settings..............................................................32

6. Selecting Where Outputs Appear..............................................................................................33


6-1. Selecting Signals ..............................................................................................................33
6-1-1. Selecting Preview Output..........................................................................................34
6-1-2. Selecting AUX / INPUT PREV / CLEAN Output ........................................................34
7. Transition Operations ............................................................................................................... 37
7-1. BLACK Transitions ........................................................................................................... 38
7-2. DSK Transitions................................................................................................................ 38
7-3. BKGD, KEY1, and KEY2 Transitions................................................................................ 39
7-3-1. CUT Transition ......................................................................................................... 39
7-3-2. MIX, FAM and NAM.................................................................................................. 40
7-3-3. WIPE Transition........................................................................................................ 41
7-3-4. DVE Transition ......................................................................................................... 42
7-4. Additional Transition Settings ........................................................................................... 44
7-4-1. Fader Limit ............................................................................................................... 44
7-4-2. Fader Operational Settings ...................................................................................... 45
7-4-3. Transition Rate ......................................................................................................... 45
7-4-4. AUTO Button Operational Setting............................................................................. 46
7-5. Selecting A Pattern ........................................................................................................... 47
7-5-1. Checking and Setting Patterns ................................................................................. 47
7-5-2. Pattern List Pop-up Menu......................................................................................... 47
7-5-3. Direct Pattern Function............................................................................................. 48
7-6. Modifying A WIPE Pattern ................................................................................................ 49
7-6-1. Making Modify Settings ............................................................................................ 49
7-6-2. Initializing WIPE MODIFY Menu............................................................................... 49
7-6-3. WIPE MODIFY Menu ............................................................................................... 50
7-7. DVE Pattern Modify.......................................................................................................... 51
7-7-1. Making Modify Settings ............................................................................................ 51
7-7-2. Initializing DVE MODIFY Menu ................................................................................ 53
7-7-3. DVE Pattern Modify Setting Example....................................................................... 53
7-7-4. Saving Modified DVE pattern as User Pattern.......................................................... 54

8. User Patterns ........................................................................................................................... 55


8-1. About the User Patterns ................................................................................................... 55
8-2. Editing User Patterns ....................................................................................................... 56
8-2-1. Displaying the USER PATTERN Menu..................................................................... 57
8-2-2. PROTECT Setting .................................................................................................... 58
8-2-3. Setting the Keypad to USER PATTERN Editing ....................................................... 58
8-2-4. Selecting the DVE Channel (Menu/Keypad)............................................................. 59
8-2-5. Creating New Keyframes ......................................................................................... 59
8-2-6. Selecting Keyframes (Menu/Keypad) ....................................................................... 60
8-2-7. Adding and Overwriting Keyframes (Keypad)........................................................... 60
8-2-8. Copying and Pasting Keyframes (Keypad)............................................................... 61
8-2-9. Deleting Keyframes (Keypad)................................................................................... 61
8-2-10. Selecting the Interpolation Mode (Menu)................................................................ 61
8-2-11. Setting the Keyframe Duration................................................................................ 62
8-2-12. Previewing User Patterns....................................................................................... 62
8-2-13. Deleting User Patterns ........................................................................................... 62
8-2-14. Exiting User Pattern Editing ................................................................................... 63
8-3. Executing User Patterns................................................................................................... 63
8-4. Modifying Created Keyframes .......................................................................................... 63

9. LINE DVE................................................................................................................................. 64
9-1. Assigning LINE DVE......................................................................................................... 64
9-1-1. Assigning to PGM bus .............................................................................................. 64
9-1-2. Assigning to PST bus ............................................................................................... 65
9-1-3. Assigning to KEY1 or KEY2 bus............................................................................... 65
9-2. DVE Options .................................................................................................................... 66
9-3. LINE DVE Modify Setting Example .................................................................................. 67
9-4. DVE MODIFY Menu ......................................................................................................... 68
9-4-1. Position and Size...................................................................................................... 69
9-4-2. DVE STILL (DVE. Ver.2.00 or later) ......................................................................... 71
9-4-3. PERSPECTIVE.........................................................................................................71
9-4-4. CROP .......................................................................................................................71
9-4-5. WARP (Option) .........................................................................................................72
9-4-6. BORDER ..................................................................................................................73
9-4-7. TRAIL / SHADOW.....................................................................................................74
9-4-8. SUB EFFECT ...........................................................................................................74
9-4-9. HILITE.......................................................................................................................75

10. Examples of Effect Operations................................................................................................76


10-1. Effects using WIPE Modify..............................................................................................76
10-1-1. Jagged Edge...........................................................................................................76
10-2. Effects Using Still Store ...................................................................................................77
10-2-1. Motion Blur..............................................................................................................77
10-2-2. Animation Logo .......................................................................................................78
10-3. Effects Using DVE ..........................................................................................................80
10-3-1. WIPE Switchover In A Video Wall (LINE DVE)........................................................80
10-3-2. DVE MULTI MOVE (DVE Pattern Modify)...............................................................81
10-3-3. PIZZA BOX (DVE Pattern Modify)...........................................................................82

11. Key Operations .......................................................................................................................84


11-1. Luminance Key Setup .....................................................................................................85
11-2. Bus Key Setup ................................................................................................................86
11-3. Available Signals .............................................................................................................88
11-3-1. KEY MATT ..............................................................................................................88
11-4. Key Adjustments .............................................................................................................89
11-4-1. TRANSPARENCY ...................................................................................................89
11-4-2. FAM ON/OFF ..........................................................................................................89
11-4-3. CLIP and GAIN .......................................................................................................89
11-4-4. Gain Clip Processing Settings.................................................................................90
11-5. Key Mask and Invert .......................................................................................................91
11-5-1. Key Invert ................................................................................................................91
11-5-2. Box Mask ................................................................................................................92
11-5-3. DSK Mask (Option) .................................................................................................93
11-6. Edge and Shadow (Option) .............................................................................................94
11-7. Key Priority (Option) ........................................................................................................95

12. Chromakeys............................................................................................................................96
12-1. Chromakey Setup Flow...................................................................................................96
12-2. Chromakey Setup ...........................................................................................................97
12-2-1. Auto Setup ..............................................................................................................97
12-2-2. Chromakey Adjustment...........................................................................................98

13. Color Correction (Option) ......................................................................................................100


13-1. Color Correction Overview ............................................................................................100
13-2. Color Corrector Specifications ......................................................................................100
13-3. Color Correction Flow ...................................................................................................101
13-4. Assigning Color Corrector Signals ................................................................................102
13-5. Proc Amp ......................................................................................................................103
13-6. Color Correction............................................................................................................103
13-6-1. Balanced Mode and Differential Mode ..................................................................104
13-6-2. Gamma Curve.......................................................................................................105
13-7. Clip Adjustment .............................................................................................................106
13-7-1. YPbPr Mode and RGB Mode ................................................................................107
13-8. Assigning User Button Signals ......................................................................................109
13-8-1. Assigning CC Channels to User Buttons...............................................................109
13-8-2. Selecting a Signal .................................................................................................109
14. Still Store ...............................................................................................................................110
14-1. Still Capture and Save...................................................................................................110
14-2. Assigning Bus................................................................................................................110

15. Event Memory .......................................................................................................................111


15-1. Saving Events ...............................................................................................................111
15-2. Recalling Events............................................................................................................112
15-2-1. Recalling Events Using Keypad (0-199) ................................................................112
15-2-2. Recalling Events Using USER Buttons (0-7) .........................................................113

16. Sequence Operation .............................................................................................................114


16-1. Overview of Sequence Function....................................................................................114
16-2. Editing Sequences ........................................................................................................115
16-2-1. Displaying the SEQUENCE Menu.........................................................................116
16-2-2. PROTECT Setting (Menu).....................................................................................117
16-2-3. Setting the Keypad to SEQUENCE Editing ...........................................................118
16-2-4. Creating New Steps (Keypad) ...............................................................................119
16-2-5. Selecting Steps (Menu/Keypad) ............................................................................119
16-2-6. Adding and Overwriting Steps (Keypad) ................................................................119
16-2-7. Copying and Pasting Steps (Keypad) ................................................................... 120
16-2-8. Deleting Steps (Keypad)....................................................................................... 120
16-2-9. Selecting the Interpolation Mode (Menu).............................................................. 120
16-2-10. Setting the Duration (Menu) ............................................................................... 120
16-2-11. Deleting Sequences ........................................................................................... 121
16-2-12. Exiting Sequence Editing ................................................................................... 121
16-2-13. Backing Up Sequence Data ............................................................................... 121
16-3. Playing Back Sequences.............................................................................................. 122
16-3-1. Sequence AUTO PLAY......................................................................................... 122
16-3-2. Setting Crosspoint Playback ................................................................................ 123
16-3-3. Bus Settings ......................................................................................................... 123
16-3-4. Selecting Loop Playback ...................................................................................... 123
16-3-5. Using Fader Link for Sequence Playback ............................................................ 124
16-3-6. Break Settings during Fader Link ......................................................................... 125

17. File Operations ..................................................................................................................... 126


17-1. CF Card........................................................................................................................ 126
17-2. Saving Data to CF Cards.............................................................................................. 126
17-3. Downloading from CF Cards ........................................................................................ 127
17-4. Deleting Memory Card Files ......................................................................................... 128
17-5. Renaming Saved Files ................................................................................................. 129
17-6. Aborting File Transfer ................................................................................................... 129

18. Additional Features............................................................................................................... 130


18-1. OU Setup ..................................................................................................................... 130
18-1-1. Display Brightness and Contrast .......................................................................... 130
18-1-2. Fader Lever Response......................................................................................... 130
18-1-3. Screen Contrast ................................................................................................... 130
18-1-4. Menu Shift Button Response................................................................................ 131
18-1-5. Warning Buzzer .................................................................................................... 131
18-1-6. Joystick Response ............................................................................................... 131
18-1-7. Screen Saver........................................................................................................ 132
18-1-8. Date/Time Setting................................................................................................. 132
18-1-9. Mode .................................................................................................................... 132
18-2. Advanced Signal Settings............................................................................................. 133
18-2-1. Selecting and Adjusting Sync Signal .................................................................... 133
18-2-2. Safety Area Markers............................................................................................. 134
18-2-3. MATT CLIP........................................................................................................... 135
18-2-4. Ancillary Data ........................................................................................................136
18-3. User Default ..................................................................................................................137
18-4. Data Recovery ..............................................................................................................137
18-5. Reboot and Initialization................................................................................................138
18-5-1. Initializing the System ...........................................................................................138
18-5-2. Initializing OU Mode MENU ..................................................................................138
18-5-3. System Reboot .....................................................................................................138

19. Interface Settings ..................................................................................................................139


19-1. GPI and Tally Control ....................................................................................................139
19-1-1. GPI IN Free Assignments .....................................................................................139
19-1-2. GPI/TALLY OUT Free Assignments ......................................................................141
19-1-3. TALLY Free Assignments ......................................................................................142
19-2. Editor Control ................................................................................................................144
19-3. Network Settings...........................................................................................................145
19-3-1. Arcnet (Option)......................................................................................................145
19-3-2. Ethernet (Option) ..................................................................................................147
19-4. Upgrading Operational Version .....................................................................................148
19-4-1. How to Verify Version............................................................................................148
19-4-2. Upgrade Procedure...............................................................................................148
19-4-3. Saving Setting Data ..............................................................................................149
19-4-4. To Upgrade MU.....................................................................................................149
19-4-5. To Upgrade OU .....................................................................................................150
19-4-6. Loading Setting Data ............................................................................................150
19-5. Changing Signal Format Data (DVE Ver.1) ...................................................................151
19-5-1. Before starting.......................................................................................................151
19-5-2. Checking the signal format data............................................................................151
19-5-3. Changing the format data .....................................................................................152
19-6. Upgrading DVE Card (DVE Ver.2) ................................................................................154
19-6-1. Checking the DVE Card Version ...........................................................................154
19-6-2. Upgrading the DVE Card ......................................................................................155

20. Specifications and Dimensions .............................................................................................157


20-1. System Specifications ...................................................................................................157
20-1-1. HVS-1000HS (HD mode)......................................................................................157
20-1-2. HVS-1000HS (SD mode) ......................................................................................158
20-1-3. HVS-1000EOU......................................................................................................159
20-2. External Dimensions .....................................................................................................160
20-2-1. HVS-1000HS ........................................................................................................160
20-2-2. HVS-1000EOU......................................................................................................161

Appendix 1. Menu List ....................................................................................................................1


1-1. STATUS menu ....................................................................................................................1
1-2. SETUP menu ......................................................................................................................2
1-3. COLOR CORRECTION menu ............................................................................................8
1-4. EDITOR menu ....................................................................................................................9
1-5. MATT menu ........................................................................................................................9
1-6. STILL menu ......................................................................................................................10
1-7. FILE menu ........................................................................................................................ 11
1-8. TRANSITION menu ..........................................................................................................12
1-9. WIPE MODIFY menu........................................................................................................13
1-10. DSK menu ......................................................................................................................14
1-11. KEY1 and KEY2 menu ....................................................................................................15
1-12. DVE MODIFY menu........................................................................................................18
1-13. USER PATTERN menu...................................................................................................22
1-14. SEQUENCE menu..........................................................................................................22
Appendix 2. Available File List...................................................................................................... 23

Appendix 3. WIPE Pattern List ..................................................................................................... 24

Appendix 4. DVE Pattern List....................................................................................................... 25

Appendix 5. User Preset Patterns (50 patterns) ........................................................................... 27


1. Prior to Starting
1-1. Welcome
Congratulations! By purchasing the Hanabi HVS-1000 series switcher you have entered the
world of FOR-A and its many innovative products. Thank you for your patronage and we hope
you will turn to FOR-A products again and again to satisfy your video and audio needs.
FOR-A provides a wide range of products, from basic support units to complex system
controllers, which have been increasingly joined by products for computer video based systems.
Whatever your needs, talk to your FOR-A representative. We will do our best to be of continuing
service to you.

1-2. About HVS-1000 Series Switchers


The Hanabi HVS-1000 series switchers are 1M/E low-cost, compact digital switchers that are
ideal for operations and mobile applications in limited space such as production, mobile relay
vans, and live signal distribution. These HD/SD switchable switchers have multi bit-rate /
multi-format capability supporting SDI HDTV and SDTV signals for usage in a wide range of
applications.
Up to 21 sources and 2 matt signals can be assigned to an M/E bus, including built-in still store
for 4 images and standard 8 primary inputs, expandable to a maximum of 17 inputs with the
addition of an option board. The standard configuration includes five outputs -- two program
outputs, a preview output, an auxiliary output, and input preview output. Available expansion
options include three auxiliary outputs. The operation panel keeps the same ease of operation of
the HVS-3000 series but now includes a CF card reader drive in the standard system for image
file transfer and backup of settings.
In addition to mix and wipe transitions, 2D DVE are available as standard, and DVE upgrades
are also available. The HVS-1000 also features distinctive effects not available in the HVS-3000,
including motion blur and logo animations using still store and mix and wipe transitions in a
modified floating DVE wall.
This HVS-1000 series switcher, the HVS-1000EOU, is designed as an operation unit specifically
for editing, and it provides the same ease of operation and functions of the previous FOR-A
VPS-400D switcher. In the standard configuration, the HVS-1000EOU has an editor connecting
facility, 200-event memory and user programmable 3D effects and sequence operation
capabilities.

Features
Full option system supports up to 16 HD/SD SDI video signal inputs and 1 camera return
input for a total of 17 inputs. Up to 8 signal outputs available; 2 PGM, 1 PREV, 1 Input Prev
and 4 AUX outputs
10-bit 4:2:2 digital component signal processing.
Support for multi bit-rate / multi-format digital component input signals. Easy signal
switchover between HD multi-format (1080/60i, 1080/24p, 720/60p, etc.) and SD format
(NTSC/PAL) signals by using the operation panel menu settings. In addition to standard 16:9
(for HDTV) and 4:3 (for SDTV), 4:3 is available for HDTV and Letterbox and Squeeze formats
are available for SDTV.
One downstream keyer is available in the standard configuration, and 2 keyers with
chromakey functions are available in the optional configuration.
Key masks are provided in standard configuration. Edge and shadow effects and priority
change are available for the 2 optional keyers.

1
HDTV tri-sync and analog black burst input signals for system synchronization and
dedicated connectors with loopthrough output for each sync signal.
MIX, FAM and NAM transitions available with 100 WIPE patterns in standard configuration,
expandable to 120 DVE patterns with option.
Provides 50 user programmable 3D effects patterns. Up to 50 keyframes available for each.
Versatile 4 channel (for S DTV) or 2-channel (for HDTV) DVE modify operations possible
with optional DVE board.
Up to 6 signal layers, including PGM, PST, 3 keys and 3D effect BKGD buses, are available
in the full option system.
Includes 4 still stores and 2 bus matt signal generators. Incorporates logo animation function
using still store.
200 event internal memory for saving and reading of setting data.
20 sequence memory. Up to 50 steps available for each.
Built-in memory card drive for uploading and downloading of setting files and image
sources.
Configuration of up to 5 MU/OU and AUX units possible with optional Arcnet board.
Standard system includes RS-422 GPI IN and GPI/TALLY OUT ports. Up to 5 Hanabi series
tally units (HVS-TALOC, HVS-TALR) can be used in RS-422 cascade connection.
Capable of various GPI input/output controls using GPI IN and GPI/TALLY OUT ports.
Supports redundant power supply for main unit and operation unit.
Main unit is a compact EIA 2RU standard size.

1-3. About This Manual


This manual is intended to help the user easily operate the Hanabi series switchers and make
full use of their functions during operations. Before configuring or operating your system, read
this operation manual thoroughly to ensure you understand the product. After reading, it is
important to keep this manual in a safe place and available for future reference.

Font Conventions
The following conventions are used through out this manual:

Boxed text (for example MATT) is used for OU buttons.


Shaded text (such as OFF) is used for the setting parameters and values in the menus.

2
2. Panel Description
2-1. Operation Unit
2-1-1. Operation Panel

HVS-1000
DIGITAL VIDE O SWITCHER

STATUS TRANS WIPE MATT SEQ EVENT DVE CH DIRECT PATT


(SETUP) (PATTERN SEL) (BORDER)

7 8 9 STORE
STILL KEY1 KEY2 DSK
(FILE) (MASK1) (MASK2) (MASK)

4 5 6 RECALL
EDITOR EDGE1
(SHADOW1)
EDGE2
(SHADOW2)
OPT SEL LCD
1 2 3 +/-
USER DVE WARP CROP
(SEQ) (FREEZE) (BORDER) (TRAIL)

X Y Z
CLEAR SHIFT ENTER
0 (CANCEL) (PAUSE) (PLAY)
ON/OFF SUB EFF SHADOW SHIFT
(MOSAIC) (HILITE) DVE POS WIPE POS DEF

ACCESS MEMORY CARD


DVE ROT AUTO CK MENU

USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

BKGD KEY1 KEY2 DSK BLACK


BUS
SELECT
TRANSITION
KEY1 KEY2 DSK EFFECT BK AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 INPUT PREV PGM PREV CLEAN DVE KEY UTILITY IN NOR NOR/REV REV FADER LIM SEQ LINK
RATE

MIX MIX MIX


WIPE WIPE WIPE
DVE DVE DVE
KEY/ KEY1
AUX
BLACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MATT DVE SHIFT FAM OVER
BLACK
TRANS
NAM ON ON

BKGD KEY1 KEY2


CUT
NEXT TRANSITION
BLACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MATT DVE SHIFT
MIX WIPE DVE
(FAM) (NAM) MIX

TRANSITION TYPE

CUT DSK
BLACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MATT DVE SHIFT AUTO
TRANS TRANS

Item Description Function


Selects menu or operational parameters
A Operational menu selection
displayed at B.
B Menu display / controls LCD menu / parameters display and controls
For number input / operational data adjust.
C Keypad / Event control section
For event save / recall operations.
D Joystick control section For number input.
E Memory card drive For data upload / download (CF card)
F User buttons For menu shortcut and function assignments.
Selects where AUX output or key use signals in
AUX/KEY output selection
G M/E inputs appear.
M/E bus for AUX and KEY For key insert or AUX signal source selection.
H M/E bus for background For background signal source selection.
For transition setup of background and key
I Transition control section
layers.

3
2-1-2. Rear Panel

RESET

PO WER 2 POW ER 1

ON ON

OFF O FF

ARCNET SERVICE I/O TO MU

RATING LABEL
A C1 00-24 0V ~50 /60 Hz IN AC100-2 40V ~5 0/6 0Hz IN

Item Description Function


A TO MU TO MU connector (PC-3108, 15-pin D-sub, female)
For AC input connection to power supply unit 1 (standard PS)
B POWER1
(AC100V-240V 50/60Hz).
For AC input connection to power supply unit 2 (optional PS)
C POWER2
(AC100V-240V 50/60Hz).
D RESET Reset switch for MU/OU.
E ARCNET BNC connector with loopthrough output for Arcnet use (option).
F SERVICE Do not use.
G Ground Terminal Used to ground unit for electrical protection.

4
2-2. Main Unit
2-2-1. Front Panel

POW ER 1 DC HVS-1000HS
ON DIGITAL VIDEO SW ITCHER
FAN

OFF

POW ER 2 DC
ON FAN

OFF

HANABI

Item Description Function


A POWER 1 Used to switch power supply unit 1 ON / OFF.
The green power indicator lights on if the power supply unit
DC power alarm
1 is operating normally. The indicator is not lit if an alarm
indicator for PS1
condition occurs.
B
The red fan alarm indicator lights on if any fan of the MU
MU fan alarm
(unit fan and fans for PS1 and PS2) fails. The indicator is
indicator
not lit when the fans are operating normally.
C POWER 2 Used to switch power supply unit 2 ON / OFF.
The green power indicator lights on if the power supply unit
DC power alarm
2 is operating normally. The indicator is not lit if an alarm
indicator for PS2
condition occurs.
D
The red fan alarm indicator lights on if any fan of the MU
MU fan alarm
(unit fan and fans for PS1 and PS2) fails. The indicator is
indicator
not lit when the fans are operating normally.

IMPORTANT
If alarm indication continues to appear, check out each unit status using the STATUS
menu (To open the STATUS menu, press the STATUS button in the menu select
section.), then power the unit off and contact your FOR-A supplier for advice.
If you have both the accessory and optional power supplies installed, you will need to
turn at least one power switch ON before you can use your MU. Normally, both
power switches should be set to ON at the same time if you want power backup
protection should one of the power units fail during operation. Note that if both
power units are set to on and one unit fails, the unit with problem will be powered
off automatically.

5
2-2-2. Rear Panel

LAN EDITOR OU GPI IN GPI/TALLY OUT

RATING LABEL
CPU (10/100BASE-T)
AC100-240V ~ 50/60Hz IN
ARCNET RS-422 ALARM TRI SYNC IN BB IN REF OUT 1
1 2

GL
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 INPUT PREV
PGM 1 PGM 2 PREV AUX 1

2
OUTPUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 UTL IN

INPUT

Item Description Function


PGM1, PGM2 For program outputs, BNC.
PREV For preview output, BNC.
A AUX1 For auxiliary output, BNC.
INPUT PREV For loopthrough output from INPUT PREV input signal, BNC.
AUX2-AUX4 For auxiliary outputs (option), BNC.
1-8 For serial digital component input signal connection, BNC.
For serial digital component input signal connection (option),
B 9-16
BNC.
For serial digital component input signal connection (option),
UTL-IN
BNC.
LAN For 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet connection (option),
C
(10/100BASE-T) RJ-45.
D ARCNET For Arcnet connection (option), BNC.
E EDITOR For Editor connection, 9-pin D-sub (female).
F RS-422 For tally unit connection, 9-pin D-sub (female).
G OU For OU connection use, 15-pin D-sub (female).
H ALARM For alarm output, 9-pin D-sub (female).
I GPI IN For GPI operation control input, 15-pin D-sub (female).
For GPI and tally operation control output, 25-pin D-sub
J GPI/TALLY OUT
(female).
For tri-sync genlock reference signal input, BNC with
TRI SYNC IN
loopthrough.
For black burst genlock reference signal input, BNC with
K BB IN
loopthrough.
For reference signal output, tri-sync and BB signal selectable in
REF OUT
the menu.
L AC IN1 For AC input connection to power supply unit 1 (standard PS)
M Ground terminal Used to ground unit for electrical protection.
N AC IN2 For AC input connection to power supply unit 2 (optional PS)
* See section 3 “Connection“ for more details about system configurations.

6
2-2-3. Interfaces

ALARM Connector

Pin Assignment Table


Pin No. Signal Name Description
1 FAN ALARM OUT Fan failure alarm. Normally open.
2 POWER ALARM OUT Power supply failure alarm. Normally close.
3 N/C Not used
4 N/C Not used
5 RESET IN External reset input. Active low initiate.
6 FAN ALARM COMMON Fan alarm common.
POWER ALARM Power supply alarm common.
7
COMMON
8 GND Common ground
9 GND Common ground

Cable Connectors
9-pin D-sub connector (male) with inch security lock screws needed for user cable
fabrication.

Fan alarm
Pins 1, 6 remain OPEN during normal operation. If fan failure occurs at HVS-1000HS side,
pins 1, 6 will short and fan alarm signal output occurs.

Power supply alarm


Pins 2, 7 remain OPEN during normal operation. If a power supply failure occurs, pins 2, 7
will short and power supply alarm signal output occurs.

External reset
External reset signal input to pin 5, shorts pin 5 to pin 9. MU reset occurs when short initiated.

* Max. contact load of 0.5A DC.

7
EDITOR Connector

Pin Assignment Table (9-pin D-sub female)


Pin No. Signal Name Description
1 FG Frame ground
2 T- Transmit data (-)
3 R+ Receive data (+)
4 SG Signal ground
5 - Not used
6 SG Signal ground
7 T+ Transmit data (+)
8 R- Receive data (-)
9 FG Frame ground
Cable Connectors
9-pin D-sub connector (male) with inch security lock screws needed for user cable
fabrication.

RS-422 Connector

Pin Assignment Table (9-pin D-sub female)


Pin No. Signal Name Description
1 FG Frame ground
2 R- Receive data (-)
3 T+ Transmit data (+)
4 SG Signal ground
5 - Not used
6 SG Signal ground
7 R+ Receive data (+)
8 T- Transmit data (-)
9 FG Frame ground
Cable Connectors
9-pin D-sub connector (male) with inch security lock screws needed for user cable
fabrication.

8
GPI IN Connector

Pin Assignment Table (15-pin D-sub female)


Pin No. Description
1 TRANS-TYPE BKGD-AUTO (default setting)
2 TRANS-TYPE KEY1-AUTO (default setting)
3 TRANS-TYPE KEY2-AUTO (default setting)
4 TRANS-TYPE DSK-AUTO (default setting)
5-10 No assignment (default setting)
11 No use
12 No use
13 Signal ground
14 Signal ground
15 Signal ground
Where "default" in table above denotes factory set default pin assignments.
*
Cabling
15-pin D-sub connector (male) with inch security lock screws needed for user cable
fabrication.

Pin Free Assign


Pin1 to 10 signal assignments shown above are factory default settings. These can be user
changed in operational menus. See section 19-1 “GPI and Tally Control" for more details.

Circuit
Switch or Relay Open corrector

External Device HVS-1000HS External Device HVS-1000HS


VCC VCC VCC VCC

9
GPI/TALLY OUT Connector

Pin Assignment Table (25-pin D-sub female)


Pin No. Signal Name Description
1 GPI TALLY OUT1 (default setting) BLACK RED TALLY
2-17 GPI TALLY OUT2-17 (default setting) IN01-16 RED TALLY
18 GPI TALLY OUT18 (default setting) UTILITY IN RED TALLY
19 GPI TALLY OUT19 (default setting) STILL1 RED TALLY
20 GPI TALLY OUT20 (default setting) STILL2 RED TALLY
21 Frame ground
22 Frame ground
23 Frame ground
24 Frame ground
25 +5V output (MAX 0.5A) (*1)
Where "default" in table above denotes factory set default pin assignments.
*
Cabling
25-pin D-sub connector (male) with inch security lock screws needed for user cable
fabrication.
(*1) Max. contact load of 0.5A DC.

Pin Free Assign


Pin1 to 20 signal assignments shown above are factory default settings. These can be user
changed in operational menus. See section 19-1 “GPI and Tally Control" for more details.

Circuit
HVS-1000HS External Device
Max voltage: 40V

Max load current:


100mA

10
2-2-4. MU Rear Panel Cards
Panel edges of each internal card that appears at the MU rear panel are positioned as shown
in the figure below (from top to bottom of MU). All cards are secured by screws on each side.
Security screws must be removed to remove cards from the MU.

LAN EDITOR OU GPI IN GPI/TALLY OUT

RATING LABEL
CPU (10/100BASE-T)
AC100-240V ~ 50/60Hz IN
ARCNET RS-422 ALARM TRI SYNC IN BB IN REF OUT 1
1 2

GL
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 INPUT PREV
PGM 1 PGM 2 PREV AUX 1

2
OUTPUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 UTL IN

INPUT

Slot Card Optional Card


1 CPU CARD
2 GENLOCK CARD HVS-ARCNET
3 OUTPUT CARD HVS-1000HSDO
4 INPUT CARD HVS-1000HSDI or HVS-1000HSCR

IMPORTANT
MU unit have a built in fan. If fan replacement becomes necessary contact your
FOR-A supplier. See section 2-2-2 “Rear Panel" for more details about fan alarm.

11
3. Connection
3-1. Basic Connection

TSG
REF
VDA
(75ohm terminator)
BB IN REF OUT
REF OUT
TRI SYNC IN
Camera 1
IN 1 PGM 1 PGM1 output
IN 2 PGM 2 PGM2 output
Character
generator IN 3 PREV PREV output
IN 4 AUX 1 AUX output
Digital video
database

ALARM System alarm output


GPI controller GPI IN GPI/TALLY OUT GPI/tally outputs
HVS-TALOC or
RS-422 HVS-TALR
OU
PC-3108

TO MU

IMPORTANT
When connecting the HVS-1000HS and the HVS-1000EOU with 15-pin D-sub
connector, do not use other than the supplied cable (PC-3018).

12
3-2. Optional Configuration

TSG
REF
VDA
(75ohm terminator)
BB IN REF OUT
REF OUT
TRI SYNC IN
Camera 1
IN 1 PGM 1 PGM1output
IN 2 PGM 2 PGM2 output
Character
generator IN 3 PREV PREV output
IN 4 AUX 1
IN 5-8 AUX 2
Digital video AUX outputs
database IN 9-12 AUX 3
IN 13-16 AUX 4

VTR UTL IN INPUT PREV Camera through output

EDITOR EDITOR ALARM System alarm output


GPI controller GPI IN GPI/TALLY OUT GPI/tally outputs

RS-422 HVS-TALOC or
HVS-TALR
ARCNET OU
HVS-TALOC or
HVS-TALR
PC-3108

75ohm
terminator
or connect HVS-TALOC or
to OU HVS-TALR
HVS-AUX16
ARCNET TO MU HVS-TALOC or
HVS-TALR
HVS-AUX16
HVS-TALOC or
HVS-TALR
HVS-AUX16 75ohm
terminated RS-422 cascading
connection

Arcnet LAN

IMPORTANT
When connecting the HVS-1000HS and the HVS-1000EOU via Arcnet , both ends of
the Arcnet should be 75 ohm terminated.

13
3-3. Aspect/Format Selection
Power ON
Turn other system configuration units to ON.
Turn the power switch(es) at the HVS-1000EOU rear panel to ON to start up OU.
Turn the power switch(es) at the HVS-1000HS front panel to ON to start up MU.

IMPORTANT
If you have both the accessory and optional power supplies installed, you will need to
turn at least one power switch ON before you can use your MU or OU. Normally, both
power switches should be set to ON at the same time if you want power backup
protection should one of the power units fail during operation.

Selecting System Signal Format


Before using your switcher, you will have to select the aspect ratio and signal format needed
based on your operational system.

STATUS(SETUP) button on OU panel should be flashing at power ON. Press SHIFT button
to light on then press STATUS(SETUP) button to access SETUP-SYSTEM menu shown
below.

SETUP SYSTEM

FORMAT MODE 1080 RATE 59.94i ASPECT 16:9 REBOOT ON

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Turn F2, F3 or F4 control to select the video aspect and format suitable for your system at
the MODE –FORMAT, RATE and ASPECT blocks. Note that if you change the MODE or
RATE, a pop-up window may appear telling you to reboot the system. Turn the same function
control to select YES then press it. A "beep" will be heard when the system is rebooted.
If you don't finish setting, select NO on the pop-up then press the same function control to go
back to the menu screen. After all settings are made, turn F5 to select REBOOT ON then
press and hold down F5 for a while. A "beep" will be heard when the system is rebooted.

IMPORTANT
Note that the setup menu above appears only when you first power ON your Hanabi
system for the first time. Settings must be made here and system rebooted before any
switcher operations can be performed. You can also change your system signal
format in the SETUP-SYSTEM menu. A system reboot is also required to confirm the
setting. Refer to section 18-5-3. "System Reboot" for more information about the
system reboot.

14
4. Menu Operations
Menus shown in the display are used to make settings that effect how your HVS-1000 series MU
responds and performs during operations. The following sections tell you how to access and
change operational parameters in the menu displays.

4-1. Menu Control Sections


The main areas of the control panel used to access and change operational menus are as
indicated in the figures and table shown below in this section.

HVS-1000
DIGITALVIDEO SWITCHER

STATUS BKGD WIPE MATT SEQ EVENT DVE CH DIRECT PATT


(SETUP) (PATTERN SEL) (BORDER)

7 8 9 STORE
STILL KEY1 KEY2 DSK
(FILE) (MASK1) (MASK2) (MASK)

4 5 6 RECALL
EDITOR EDGE1
(SHADOW1)
EDGE2
(SHADOW2)
OPT SEL LCD
1 2 3 +/-
USER DVE WARP CROP
(SEQ) (FREEZE) (BORDER) (TRAIL)
X Y Z
SHIFT
0 CLEAR
(CANCEL) (PAUSE)
ENTER
(PLAY)
ON/OFF SUB EFF SHADOW SHIFT
(MOSAIC) (HILITE) DVE POS WIPEPOS DEF

ACCESS MEMORY CARD


DVEROT AUTO CK MENU

USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

BKGD KEY1 KEY2 DSK BLACK


BUS

Item Function Description


A Menu Selection Selects which menu is accessed and appears in the display.
B Display Area Displays settings and parameter data for menu selected.
C Keypad Operations Used to change or adjust menu settings by keypad input.
Used to move the cursor between parameter lines within
F1
Function displayed menus.
D Controls Used to change operational settings in selected parameter
F2-F5
lines.
UP / DOWN buttons Used to change menu pages if the menu has multiple pages.
E Joystick Operations Used to change or adjust menu settings by using joystick.

4-2. Making Settings


4-2-1. Selecting Needed Menu
To display a menu, press the button for the desired menu in the menu select section (A on the
previous page) of the left side of the menu screen. If the SHIFT button is pressed to turn on
the button light, the menu in parentheses ( ) is displayed when the respective menu button is
pressed. Turning F1 control allows you to move between parameter lines within the menu.
To move between menu pages, use the UP/DOWN button at the right of the controls. The UP
DOWN button lights on to indicate that there is another menu page to be moved. For details
on menu contents, see section 4-3 “Accessing the Menus’ and Appendix 1 “Menu List.”
In case of HVS-1000EOU, how the SHIFT button operationally responds is determined by a
setting made in the MENU SHIFT item of the SETUP-OU MODE menu. See section 18-1-4
for more details.

15
Menu display example (MATT menu)
Pressing the MATT button in the menu select section displays the MATT menu. The
MATT menu is displayed in the menu screen.

HVS-1000EOU NORMAL MODE (1) JOY STICK CTRL : DVE POS


2004/08/01 POSX : 1200 Information
(3) section
12:00:00 WIPE PAT No:000 BKGD PAT No.:100 POSY : 1300
KEY1 PAT No:120 (2) KEY2 PAT No:120 SIZEX/Y : 300
MATT (4)

BUS MATT1 SAT 50.0 LUM 50.0 HUE 180.0 COLOR

BUS MATT2 SAT 50.0 LUM 50.0 HUE 12.3 COLOR

BKGD MATT SAT 12.3 LUM 50.0 HUE 180.0 COLOR


Parameter
KEY1 MATT SAT 12.3 LUM 12.3 HUE 12.3 COLOR section
(5) (6)
KEY1 EDGE SAT 12.3 LUM 12.3 HUE 12.3 COLOR

KEY1 BORDER SAT 12.3 LUM 12.3 HUE 12.3 COLOR

KEY2 MATT SAT 12.3 LUM 12.3 HUE 12.3 COLOR

KEY2 EDGE
Selected SAT lines
line / Total menu 12.3 LUM 12.3 HUE 12.3 COLOR

BKGD MATT SAT LUM HUE COLOR


(7) 50.0 50.0 (8) 180.0 SELECT Setting
section
[1/10] SELECT

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
No. Name Description
Displays the current date and time (Available on the HVS
(1) Date/Time display
-1000HS units with a serial number higher than 9870038)
Operation mode Displays the current operating mode of the panel, Normal,
(2)
display User Pattern or Sequence mode.
Displays information corresponding to the operating mode
(3) Information display
in the operation panel.
Joystick operation Displays the parameter and value currently selected with
(4)
display the joystick.
(5) Menu name Displays the name of the menu.
A parameter line can have up to four parameters.
You can move between lines by turning F1 control. If the
(6) Parameter lines menu is spread over multiple pages, you can be move
between pages by pressing the UP/DOWN button. The
selected parameter line is highlighted.
(7) Parameter section Lists the parameters and their values in the menu.
Selected parameter
(8) Currently selected parameter line
line and line number
Used to make settings by turning F2 to F5 controls under
(9) Setting section
the respective parameters in the selected parameter line.

16
4-2-2. Changing Parameter Values
Turning the F1 control changes the parameter line. The currently selected parameter line is
displayed at the bottom of the menu, and the parameters for that line can be set. In the
example on the previous page, the BUS MATT1 line is selected, and the SAT, LUM, and
HUE parameters can be changed by turning the F2, F3 and F4 controls, respectively.

Function control operations (F2 to F5) Description


Turn clockwise Increases value.
Turn counter-clockwise Decreases value.
Switches to keypad input.
Press
Confirms the input value.
Press and hold down at least 1 sec. Reset the parameter to default value.
Moves to next/previous page in the pop
Turn while pressing up menu or quickly increases/decreases
value.

IMPORTANT
In some system setup parameters in the SETUP menu, the value must be confirmed
by pressing the function control below each parameter after changing setting. In this
case, after the parameter is changed, the setting value is highlighted. Press the
related control to confirm the setting.

4-2-3. Confirmation Needed Parameters


In the parameters below, the value must be confirmed by pressing a function control below
each parameter.

Parameter Menu Reference


REBOOT SETUP top 18-5-3 "System Reboot"
INIT SETUP-SYSTEM 18-5-1 "Initializing the System"
SET SETUP-DVE SETUP 9-4-4 "CROP"
OU INIT SETUP-OU MODE 18-5-2 "Initializing OU MODE Menu"
INIT DVE MODIFY 7-7-2 " Initializing DVE MODIFY Menu"
STILL1-4 STILL 14-1 "Still Store"
DVE STILL STILL 10-3-3 "PIZZA BOX"

17
4-2-4. Keypad Input
You can also use the keypad to input number settings to a menu. The general procedure for
making and changing operational menu settings by keypad is as follows. Keypad numbers
can only be used to input operational parameter settings that are numerical in nature. (For
example; 100, 0, etc.)
Press a control below each parameter (F2 - F5) to select parameter block to be changed.
Lights on the keypad turn on green.
Next, input setting at keypad.
Then press ENTER to confirm the setting.

IMPORTANT
When pressing a control, press it down lightly and release it within 1 sec. Note that if
you press and hold a control for more than 1 sec., related setting will be returned to the
default setting and a beep will be heard when this happens.

Additional Related Keypad Input Notes:


Pressing INC or DEC in keypad changes setting by 1 up or down respectively.
Pressing CLEAR before ENTER clears changes just made without applying them to
operation.

18
4-2-5. Joystick Input
You can also use the joystick for making settings in menus. The general procedures for
making and changing operational menu settings using a joystick are as follows.

Changing parameter values using Joystick


Press the MENU button in the joystick section. The MENU button and the X, Y and Z
buttons will turn on.
Three parameters from the left (corresponding to the X, Y and Z axes of the paddle) of
the selected parameter line in the menu can be changed using the joystick. Once you
have select a parameter line, moving the joystick in directions X (left / right), Y (down / up)
or Z (turn CCW or CW) will change the first, second and third setting in three blocks
starting from the left.

Left Right
(-X) (+X)

X, Y, and Z buttons determine which


parameters can be changed via Up Down
joystick movement. If any of these (-Y) (+Y)
three buttons are unlit, the related
parameter is locked out and cannot X Y Z
be joystick changed.
DVE POS WIPE POS DEF

DVE ROT AUTO CK MENU CW CCW


(+Z) (-Z)

IMPORTANT
Note that you cannot use the joystick to input settings to the SETUP menus.

Joystick Specific Inputs for Position and Rotation Parameters


By pressing the following buttons in the joystick section you can directly access and change
the respective position or rotation parameters without opening menus.

Button Accessed Menu Parameters to be changed


WIPE POS WIPE MODIFY WIPE POS (X, Y)
DVE POS DVE DVE POS (X, Y)
DVE ROT DVE LOCAL ROT (X, Y, Z)
AUTO CK *KEY1 (KEY2) POSX, POSY
* The AUTO CK button becomes effective when CHR (Chromakey) is selected for TYPE
parameter in KEY SOURCE1 line of the KEY1 or KEY2 menu.

4-2-6. ON/OFF Button


The ON/OFF button at the bottom left of the menu select section is the ON/OFF selector
button for the setting values. Press the menu button in the menu select section to display the
respective menu. Then, pressing the ON/OFF button switches on or off the parameter
corresponding to the menu button in the menu select section.

19
4-3. Menu Display Descriptions
4-3-1. Menu Select Section
To display a menu, press the button for the desired menu in the menu select section of the
left side of the menu screen. If the SHIFT button is pressed to turn on the button light, the
menu in parentheses ( ) is displayed when the respective menu button is pressed. See the
table following.
STATUS TRANS WIPE MATT
(SETUP) (PATTERN SEL) (BORDER)

STILL KEY1 KEY2 DSK


(FILE) (MASK1) (MASK2) (MASK)

EDITOR EDGE1
(SHADOW1)
EDGE2
(SHADOW2)
OPT SEL LCD

USER DVE WARP CROP


(SEQ) (FREEZE) (BORDER) (TRAIL)

ON/OFF SUB EFF SHADOW SHIFT


(MOSAIC) (HILITE)

Button Menu Description


STATUS (SETUP) STATUS Displays operational status information
STATUS (SETUP) SETUP Accesses system operational setup parameters.
Accesses menu for still store operation,
STILL (FILE) STILL
parameters
Accesses menu for memory card file related
STILL (FILE) FILE
operations.
Accesses editor control settings.
EDITOR EDITOR
(Editor option required.)
USER (SEQ) USER PATTERN Accesses menu for making user patterns
USER (SEQ) SEQUENCE Accesses sequence operation settings.
TRANS
TRANSITION Accesses transition settings.
(PATTERN SEL)
TRANSITION Used to set and display preset pattern selection.
TRANS
(WIPE PATTERN) (WIPE or DVE PATTERN menus are easy to
(PATTERN SEL)
(DVE PATTERN) access from the PATTERN SELECT menu.)
MATT MATT Accesses color MATT settings.
COLOR Accesses color correction settings.
OPT SEL
CORRECTION (HVS-1000CC option required.)
WIPE MODIFY menu
WIPE (BORDER) WIPE MODIFY Accesses WIPE modify menus.
KEY1 and KEY2 menus (option)
Used for key1 setup. Also sets auto rate, fader
KEY1(MASK)
limit for key transition, mask and chromakey.
KEY1
EDGE1
Used to set key1 edge and shadow.
(SHADOW1)
Used for key2 setup. Also sets auto rate, fader
KEY2(MASK)
limit for key transition, mask and chromakey.
KEY2
EDGE2(SHADO
Used to set key2 edge and shadow.
W2)
DSK menu
Used for DSK setup. Also sets auto rate, fader
DSK (MASK) DSK
limit for key transition and mask.

20
DVE MODIFY menu
DVE (FREEZE)
WARP (BORDER)
Accesses DVE pattern modify menus.
CROP (TRAIL) DVE MODIFY
Accesses Line DVE setting menus
SUB EFF (MOSAIC)
SHADOW (HILITE)
If the SHIFT button is pressed to turn on the button light, the menu in parentheses ( ) is
displayed when the respective menu button is pressed.

4-3-2. Menu Access Shortcuts

Button Name Button Location Accessed Menu


PGM/PST and AUX/KEY bus
MATT(*1) MATT
section
STL1 to PGM/PST and AUX/KEY bus
STILL
STL4(*1) section
MIX TRANSITION control section TRANSITION
WIPE TRANSITION control section WIPE PATTERN or TRANSITION(*2)
DVE TRANSITION control section DVE PATTERN or TRANSITION(*2)
FADER LIMIT TRANSITION control section TRANSITION
DVE KEY AUX/KEY bus section SETUP-OUTPUT
(*1) Note that MATT and STL1 - STL4 buttons are assigned to MATT and STILL1 - STILL4
signals respectively at M/E crosspoints. (Refer to section 5-3 “Input Signals.")
(*2) Which menu to be accessed when clicking twice the respective button can be set in the
SETUP-OU MODE menu. When 1 is selected for MODE item in the menu, PATTERN menu
will open. When 2 is selected, TRANSITION menu will open.

21
4-3-3. User Buttons
The User buttons can be assigned to specific menu pages for use as a menu shortcut. They
can be also applied to functions such as turning the EDITOR or GPI IN ON / OFF.
There are two methods (as shown below) for assigning menus or functions to USER buttons.
Assigning a menu and function to a USER button
Press the SHIFT button to light on.
Press the STATUS(SETUP) button to open the SETUP top menu.
Turn F1 to select FREE ASSIGN then press F1 to display the SETUP - FREE ASSIGN
menu.
Turn F1 to select the desired USER button for the USER item. The selected USER
button becomes a lit indication.
To assign a menu page, turn F2 control to select MENU for the TYPE item. To assign a
function, select FUNC.
Turn F3 to select the menu page or function to be assigned. If a function is assigned, it
will be lit orange if the corresponding function is ON, and unlit if it is OFF. Each function
assigned USER button can also be a menu shortcut. You can go to the menu directly by
double-clicking the related USER button.

IMPORTANT
When trying to assign a menu page or a function to the lit (already assigned) user
button, the user button goes to flashing orange. Pressing the button again overwrites
the previous entry.

When MENU was selected for the TYPE item


Setting Menu Page Menu Line
TRANS/FADER LIMIT TRANS RATE1
BKGD XPT / MATT TRANS BKGD MATT
WIPE / DVE PATTERN SELECT PATTERN SEL
KEY1 GAIN / CLIP KEY SOURCE1
KEY1 MATT MASK MASK TYPE
KEY1 EDGE EDGE STS
KEY1
KEY1 SHADOW SHADOW
KEY1 AUTO CK AUTO CK
KEY1 MANUAL CK MANU ADJUST
KEY2 GAIN / CLIP KEY SOURCE1
KEY2 MATT MASK MASK TYPE
KEY2 EDGE EDGE STS
KEY2
KEY2 SHADOW SHADOW
KEY2 AUTO CK AUTO CK
KEY2 MANUAL CK MANU ADJUST
DSK GAIN / CLIP KEY SOURCE1
DSK
DSK MATT MASK MASK TYPE
STATUS BTN XPT STATUS STATUS BUTTON XPT
SEQUENCE SEQUENCE SEQ SET
USER PATTERN USER PATTERN PAT CTRL

22
When FUNC was selected for the TYPE item
Function Button indication
EDITOR (Default: USER1)
GPI IN (Default:: USER4)
SAFETY AREA AUX1
ON: lit orange
SAFETY AREA AUX2 - 4 (option) OFF: unlit
SAFETY AREA PGM, SAFETY AREA PVW
SIDECUT AUX1-4, SIDECUT PGM, SIDECUT PVW
BUS INHIBIT
GPI OUTPUT 1- 16 Lit orange while pressing the button
ON: lit red
LINE_DVE_PGM, LINE_DVE_PST, LINE_DVE_KEY1-2
OFF: lit green
KF DIRECTION NORMAL: unlit, REVERSE: lit orange
STILL1-4 STORE Always lit orange
WIPE BORDER ENABLE
WIPE BORDER SIGNAL
WIPE EDGE TYPE SQU / SAW/RIP
KEY1 INVERT
KEY1 MASK BOX_A / BOX_O / DSK_A / DSK_O
KEY1 MASK INVERT
KEY1 EDGE NORMAL
KEY1 EDGE OLINE
KEY1 SHADOW ENABLE
ON: lit orange
KEY2 INVERT OFF: unlit
KEY2 MASK BOX_A / BOX_O / DSK_A / DSK_O
KEY2 MASK INVERT
KEY2 EDGE NORMAL
KEY2 EDGE OLINE
KEY2 SHADOW ENABLE
DSK INVERT
DSK MASK BOX_A / BOX_O
DSK MASK INVERT
*1) SEQUENCE LOOP ENABLE
*1) SEQUENCE DIRECTION NORMAL: unlit, REVERSE: lit orange
*2) STEP / KF ADD
*2) STEP / KF OVERWRITE
*2) STEP / KF INSERT
*2) STEP / KF INC
*2) STEP / KF DEC
*2) STEP / KF PASTE Always lit
*2) STEP / KF DELETE
*1) SEQUENCE AUTO PLAY
*1) SEQUENCE PAUSE
WIPE MODIFY RESET
DVE MODIFY RESET
*3) CC1 SELECT (INPUT/BUTTON)
*3) CC2 SELECT (INPUT/BUTTON)
Lit orange when the button selected
*4) CC KEY1 SELECT (INPUT/BUTTON)
*4) CC KEY2 SELECT (INPUT/BUTTON)
Event not stored: unlit
*5) EVENT No.00-07 RECALL Event stored: lit orange
*1) Available in SEQUENCE MODE. See section 16-2-1 “Displaying the SEQUENCE Menu“ for more
details.
*2) When in SEQUENCE MODE: Sequence step editing
When in USER PATTERN MODE: User pattern keyframe editing
When in NORMAL MODE: Not available.
*3) HVS-1000CC software option required. See section 13 "Color Correction (Option).”
*4) HVS-KYCC hardware option required. See section 13 "Color Correction (Option).”
*5) See section 15-2-2 "Recalling Events Using USER Buttons (0-7).”

23
NOTE
Note that each GPI OUTPUT function (1-16) represents the ON/OFF setting for the
GPI OUTPUT1-16 assigned to GPI/TALLY OUT connector pins respectively set at
GPI/TALLY OUT sub menu of the SYSTEM- GPI/TALLY OUT menu. (Refer to section
19-1-2 "GPI/TALLY OUT Free Assignments".)

4-4. Returning to Default


If you need to return a specified setting to the factory made default setting, this can be done by
the following two procedures.

4-4-1. Returning Each Parameter to Default


Press and hold the related F2 to F5 control to return to factory default settings.
To use a joystick
Use the menu select buttons to access the menu setting you want to return to factory
default setting.
Turn F1 to cursor select correct line.
Set the X, Y and / or Z buttons in the joystick section to lit orange to select which settings
in the group will be returned to default. (For example, if the X button only lit orange when
DEF (default) button is pressed, only X parameter will be returned to the default setting.
Press DEF (default) button. When default button is pressed, the settings related to the lit
X, Y and / or Z buttons will be returned to their original factory made defaults.

IMPORTANT
All setting data for the WIPE MODIFY and/or DVE MODIFY menus returns to factory
deafult when the DEF button is pressed and held down at least 1 second while the
WIPE POS and/or DVE POS button is lit.

4-4-2. Returning Menus to Default


If you need to return all settings in a specified menu to the factory made default settings, this
can be done using the INIT parameter in each top menu.
Turn the corresponding control to select ALL for the INIT parameter.
Press and hold down the control at least 1 second. All settings in the menu return to
defaults.

IMPORTANT
Note that crosspoint settings cannot be set to default.

The table below shows the menus that have an INIT parameter and its available INIT
selection.

Menu button Menu Set to Default Menu button Menu Set to Default
WIPE MOD WIPE MODIFY KEY1 KEY1
DVE MOD DVE MODIFY KEY2 KEY2
DSK DSK

24
4-4-3. Returning to User Default
You can also use parameters preset by the user as the default settings. The user defaults are
then used as the initial values of the normal parameters. Once the user default values are set,
the user defaults can be enabled with the normal operation for returning to the parameter
initial values. See section 18-3 “User Defaults” for details about making the user default
settings.

25
5. Selecting Input Signals
5-1. Bus Button Indications
5-1-1. Color Indication
The bus buttons light up as shown below to indicate the signal status.
Bus button Lit color Description
Red Indicates on air.
PGM, PST Orange Indicates next output.
KEY (*1) Indicates that the PST bus or the KEY bus (which
Green
is off-air) is set to LINE DVE.
* The AUX/KEY bus section is shared by the KEY and AUX outputs. When the KEY1, KEY2, or DSK output
selection button is pressed and turns on, the bus button of the insert signal assigned to that key lights up.

5-1-2. Flip-Flop
HVS-1000 series OUs are provided with one M/E, and it has a PGM (current out) and PST
(next out) background signal selection side. The factory default setting for M/E switchover
response is a flip-flop type. When using the OU and if you need a non flip-flop type bus
response, you can change the M/E signal button response so that it cues the operator when
the A/B bus switchover occurs.

PGM/PST Type
When the PST next signal finishes moving to the output line after a background transition, the
signal indications at the M/E will flip-flop. The previous PST side selected signal now
becomes the PGM side selected signal and the previous PGM side selected signal now
becomes the PST side signal. The bottom bus series is always the PST bus.

A/B Type
Even after a transition, the indications do not flip-flop, and there is no switchover of the bus
buttons from top to bottom.

Setting procedure
The procedure for setting M/E signal button response type is made in BUS TYPE parameter
in the SETUP - BUS CONTROL menu.
In the menu select section press the SHIFT button to light on. Then press
STATUS(SETUP) button to display the SETUP top menu. Turn F1 to cursor select BUS
CTRL. Press F1 or the DOWN button to display the SETUP-BUS CONTROL menu.
In the SETUP-BUS CONTROL menu, turn F1 to select BUS TYPE parameter line. Then
turn F3 to select P/P (PGM/PST) or A/B. Press ENTER in the keypad to apply the setting..

26
5-2. MATT
MATT signals can be used in a variety of ways in the HVS-1000 series. Two different MATT
signals can be assigned to the M/E bus. Also, MATT signals are used for the insert signal, edge,
and shadow of the keyer. These MATT signals can also be set in the respective KEY menu, but
they can also be set together in the MATT menu.
The MATT color settings can be made in one of two ways. One way is to individually adjust the
SAT, LUM, and HUE parameters to create a color. The other way is to select the color from the
provided 6-color palette. Four user colors can also be registered in the color palette.

IMPORTANT
Two MATT signals can be used in the M/E bus. The PGM/PST bus and AUX/KEY bus
share signals. The MATT signals can be assigned to any bus button. For the
assignment procedure, see section 5-3-3 “Bus Signal Assignment and Inhibit
Settings.”

MATT menu
Press the MATT button in the menu select section. The MATT menu is displayed.
Turn the F1 control to move to the parameter line where the setting will be made.

Parameter line Description Same parameter in another menu


BUS MATT1 M/E bus assignment None
BUS MATT2 M/E bus assignment None
Used as background when using
BKGD_MATT two or more channel DVE or using TRANSITION menu BKGD-MATT
EFFECT BG for WIPE border.
KEY1_MATT Key 1 insert (fill) KEY1 menu MATT COLOR
KEY1_EDGE Key 1 edge KEY1 menu EDGE COLOR
KEY1_SHDW Key 1 shadow KEY1 menu SHADOW COLOR
KEY2_MATT Key 2 insert (fill) KEY2 menu MATT COLOR
KEY2_EDGE Key 2 edge KEY2 menu EDGE COLOR
KEY2_SHDW Key 2 shadow KEY2 menu SHADOW COLOR
DSK_MATT DSK insert (fill) DSK menu MATT COLOR

Turn the F2, F3, and F4 controls to adjust the SAT, LUM, and HUE parameters and set the color
to be used.
Parameter Specifications Setting range
SAT Color density 0.0-100.0
LUM Color brightness 0.0-100.0
HUE Color hue 0.0-359.5

NOTE
The amplitude range of the brightness/color signal can be set for the MATT signal. For
details, see section 18-2-3 “MATT CLIP.”

27
The color palette can also be used to make settings. Pressing the F5 control displays a
pop-up color palette. Turn F5 to select the color. Select EXIT and then press F5 to close the
color palette, return to the MATT menu. The selected color will be set.

COLOR SELECT CTRL : F5

EXIT

USER1 USER2 USER3 USER4

Registering user colors


Four user colors can be registered in the color palette. The procedure is shown below.
Adjust the SAT, LUM, and HUE values in one of the parameter lines in the MATT menu, and
then create the color that you want to register in the color palette.
Turn F5 to select ENTRY, and then press F5 to open the color palette.
Turn F5 to select the User Color icon that you want to register.
Press F5 to register the created color to the selected User Color icon. This automatically returns
you to the MATT menu. If you do not want to change any settings, select EXIT and then press
F5 to return to the MATT menu.

28
5-3. Input Signals
5-3-1. Signal Name
Signals available for selection at the M/E can be assigned user specified names to make
identification of signal sources easier for the operator. User names can be given to MU rear
panel input signals, internally generated black, white and matt signals, plus all 4 still capture
pictures. Follow the procedure below to name a signal.
In the menu select section press the SHIFT to light on. Then press the STATUS(SETUP)
button to display the SETUP top menu.
Turn F1 to select INPUT. Press F1 or DOWN button to display the SETUP-INPUT menu.
The default signal names are as in the following table. Use F1 to select the name of the
signal you want to make a new name in this menu.

Signal Description
BLACK Black signal
MU rear panel inputs 1 to 16
IN01 to 16
(9 - 16 added when input option installed)
(UTILITY-IN)* MU rear panel UTL-IN input
STILL1 to STILL4 Still pictures 1 to 4
MATT1 to MATT2 Internal color bus matt signal
WHITE White signal
COLOR BAR Color bar signal
* The UTL-IN signal can be used as a M/E bus signal if the UTL-IN TYPE in the
SETUP-BUS CONTROL menu is set to INPUT.

Once your signal is selected, you can assign a name of up to 4 characters (ASCII code)
by selecting 1 character each at the SIGNAL NAME-CHARA1 through CHARA4
parameter blocks (set using F2 - F5).
All name settings are made, press F6 to apply the setting for APPLY parameter.

If you want to name another signal, just change the selection at SIGNAL and input a new
name.

29
5-3-2. Selecting M/E Bus Signals
In the case of HVS-1000EOU, two signal sections are assigned to each bus button and the
SHIFT button determines which one of the two is available at any given time.
BLACK, MU rear panel input 01 - 08, 4 Stills and 2 Matt signals are assigned to M/E bus in
this order at the factory default.

Bus signals Black, 1-8 and MATT1 (factory default assignments) can be selected by pressing
the related bus button (Black, 1-8 and MATT1) directly.
Bus signals White, 9-16 and MATT2 (factory default assignments) can be selected by
pressing the related bus button with the SHIFT. How the SHIFT button operationally
responds is determined by a setting made in the BUS SHIFT item of the SETUP-OU MODE
menu. (See below.)

BUS SHIFT Setting Description


Bus signals White, 9-16 and MATT2 cannot be selected by
OFF using bus buttons. However, they can be selected using a
keyer menu.
Bus signals White, 9-16 and MATT2 can be selected by
NORMAL (default) pressing bus buttons while the SHIFT button is pressed and
held.
Bus signals White, 9-16 and MATT2 can be selected by
TOGGLE pressing bus buttons after the SHIFT button is pressed to
light on.
When Set to NORMAL (default):
Bus signals Black, 1-8 and MATT1 (factory default assignments) can be selected by pressing
the corresponding button (Black, 1-8 and MATT) directly if the SHIFT button lights off.

BLACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MATT DVE SHIFT

Bus 2 is selected.

BLACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MATT DVE SHIFT

Bus 1 is selected.

Bus signals White, 9-16 and MATT2 (factory default assignments) can be selected by
pressing the corresponding button (Black, 1-8 and MATT) while the SHIFT button is pressed
and held. For example, if you want to select 15, press 7 while the SHIFT button is pressed
and held.
BLACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MATT DVE SHIFT

BLACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MATT DVE SHIFT

Press 7 while holding down the SHIFT.

BLACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MATT DVE SHIFT

SHIFT unlit

BLACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MATT DVE SHIFT

The button 7 turns on and the bus 15 is selected SHIFT lit

30
When Set to Toggle:
Bus signals Black, 1-8 and MATT1 can be selected by pressing the corresponding button
directly if the SHIFT button lights off.

BLACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MATT DVE SHIFT

Bus 3 is selected when 3 is pressed.

BLACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MATT DVE SHIFT

Bus 2 is selected when 2 is pressed.

Bus signals White, 9-16 and MATT2 can be selected by pressing the corresponding bus
button after the SHIFT button is pressed to light on.

2) Press 7 with SHIFT lit 1) Press the SHIFT to light up

BLACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MATT DVE SHIFT

BLACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MATT DVE SHIFT

NOTE
Once the SHIFT button is pressed to light on, the bus buttons in the same line are
turned to bus signals White, 9-16 and MATT2. Then you can select the bus signals
White, 9-16 and MATT2 by presssing bus buttons with the SHIFT lit. The SHIFT is
pressed when lit, it becomes unlit and the related bus buttons go back to Black, 1-8
and MATT1.

31
5-3-3. Bus Signal Assignment and Inhibit Settings
Primary and optional video inputs, internally generated signals (MATT1, MATT2 etc) and
captured stills can be freely assigned to appear at any given M/E bus signal button using the
procedure below.
In the menu select section press the SHIFT button to light on. Then press the
STATUS(SETUP) button to display the SETUP top menu.
Turn F1 to select BUTTON XPT. Press F1 or DOWN button to display the
SETUP-BUTTON XPT menu.
In the SETUP-BUTTON XPT menu turn F1 to select the bus button where a signal to be
assigned.
Turn F2 to select the signal to be assigned under SIGNAL item. (See the table below.)
You can also select the signal by turning F3 under NAME item.

Parameter line SIGNAL Signal


NONE Unable to select signal
BLACK Internal black signal
BLACK MU rear panel inputs 1 to 16
01 to 16 (9 to 16 added when input option
BUTTON 01 to 16 installed.)
SHIFT+ BLACK (UTL-IN)* MU rear panel UTL-IN input
SHIFT+BT01 to 16 STILL1 to STILL4 Still pictures 1 to 4
SHIFT+ MATT MATT1 to MATT2 Internal color bus matt signals
WHITE Internal white signal
COLBAR Color bar signal
* The UTL-IN signal can be used as a M/E bus signal if the UTL-IN TYPE in the
SETUP-BUS CONTROL menu is set to INPUT.

If you turn F4 to set the INHIBIT to ON for a bus button, the selected bus button for the
PGM/PST cannot be selected. Each button inhibit setting is enabled only when the BUS
INHIBIT setting in the SYSTEM-BUS CONTROL menu is set to ON.

IMPORTANT
The INHIBIT setting has no effect for the AUX/KEY bus. Even if a bus button cannot
be used with the PGM/PST, it can be used for the key source, key insert or AUX
output.

32
6. Selecting Where Outputs Appear
6-1. Selecting Signals
The relationship between signal output connectors at the rear panel of MU and output selection
button on Hanabi series OUs is as indicated in the figure and table below.

LAN EDITOR OU GPI IN GPI/TALLY OUT

RATING LABEL
CPU (10/100BASE-T)
AC100-240V ~ 50/60Hz IN
ARCNET RS-422 ALARM TRI SYNC IN BB IN REF OUT 1
1 2

GL
AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 INPUT PREV
PGM 1 PGM 2 PREV AUX 1

2
OUTPUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 UTL IN

INPUT

HVS-1000
DIGITAL VIDEO SWITCHER

STATUS TRANS WIPE MATT SEQ EVENT DVE CH DIRECT PATT


(SETUP) (PATTERN SEL) (BORDER)

7 8 9 STORE
STILL KEY1 KEY2 DSK
(FILE) (MASK1) (MASK2) (MASK)

4 5 6 RECALL
EDITOR EDGE1
(SHADOW1)
EDGE2
(SHADOW2)
OPT SEL LCD
1 2 3 +/-
USER DVE WARP CROP
(SEQ) (FREEZE) (BORDER) (TRAIL)

X Y Z
CLEAR SHIFT ENTER
0 (CANCEL) (PAUSE) (PLAY)
ON/OFF SUB EFF SHADOW SHIFT
(MOSAIC) (HILITE) DVE POS WIPE POS DEF

ACCESS MEMORY CARD


DVE ROT AUTO CK MENU

USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

BKGD KEY1 KEY2 DSK BLACK


BUS
SELECT
TRANSITION
KEY1 KEY2 DSK EFFECT BK AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 INPUT PREV PGM PREV CLEAN DVE KEY UTILITY IN NOR NOR/REV REV FADER LIM SEQ LINK
RATE

MIX MIX MIX


WIPE WIPE WIPE
DVE DVE DVE
KEY/ KEY1
AUX
BLACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MATT DVE SHIFT FAM OVER
BLACK
TRANS
NAM ON ON

BKGD KEY1 KEY2


CUT
NEXT TRANSITION
BLACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MATT DVE SHIFT
MIX WIPE DVE
(FAM) (NAM) MIX

TRANSITION TYPE

CUT DSK
BLACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MATT DVE SHIFT AUTO
TRANS TRANS

Connectors at
Item OU panel selection button Reference
the rear panel
A PGM1, PGM2
Preview output is chosen at the NEXT TRANSITION
section on the panel. Whether the DSK appears on the
B PREV 6-1-1
preview or not can be selected in the TRANSITION
menu.
AUX1 1) Select an AUX output.
AUX2 (option)
CE 2) Select a signal from AUX/KEY bus and, PREV, 6-1-2
AUX3 (option)
AUX4 (option) CLEAN, DVE KEY and UTILITY buttons.
1) Select the INPUT PREV in the BUS SELECT section.
2) Select a signal from AUX/KEY bus and UTILITY IN
D INPUT PREV buttons. 6-1-2
INPUT PREV can pass the thru output from IN1-16,
UTL-IN and STILL1-4.

33
6-1-1. Selecting Preview Output
The signals output from the PREV output connector at the MU rear panel can be selected
from the four signals BKGD, KEY1, KEY2, or DSK. The video image for BKGD, KEY1, and
KEY2 can be selected in the next transition section for verifying preview output.
DSK display to preview output can be switched on and off by selecting in the menu. ON/OFF
are selected using the DSK parameter block of PREV SEL line in the TRANSITION menu.
(The default setting is OFF.)

6-1-2. Selecting AUX / INPUT PREV / CLEAN Output


All signals, programs, previews, clean output, and DVE KEY signals assigned to bus buttons
can be freely assigned to AUX1 to AUX4. The signals are assigned as shown below. (AUX2
to AUX4 are optional.) The IN01-16, UTILITY IN, and STILL1-4 signal can be assigned to the
INPUT PREV connector.
Select the button in the Bus Select section where the output setting will be made.

DVE KEY
Select the output target
BUS
SELECT
KEY1 KEY2 DSK EFFECT BK AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 INPUT PREV PGM PREV CLEAN DVE KEY UTILITY IN

KEY/
AUX
BLACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MATT DVE SHIFT

Select the output signal

Select the output signal in the KEY/AUX bus section.


The signals assigned to the bus buttons are shown below.

Selected buttons Signal


1-16 Signals assigned in the bus assignments (Same as PGM/PST bus)
PGM Program output
PREV Preview output (Next output with KEY)
M/E clean output appears at connector (with or without keys).
CLEAN
See section 6-1-2 “Selecting AUX / INPUT PREV / CLEAN Output.”
Signal assigned to DVE KEY button. See next page.
DVE KEY
See section 6-1-2 “Selecting AUX / INPUT PREV / CLEAN Output.”
Signals input to UTL IN connector on MU rear panel.
UTILITY IN
See section 6-1-2 “Selecting AUX / INPUT PREV / CLEAN Output.”
*In INPUT PREV output, only buttons assigned to 1-16, UTL-IN, and STILL1-4 can be selected. DVE
button cannot be selected, because a signal is not assigned to the button.

IMPORTANT
When the optional HVS-AUX16 is used, the AUX and INPUT PREV output can be
controlled externally. To control the INPTU PREV output, specify AUX5 from the
HVS-AUX16.

34
DVE KEY
The following signals can be assigned to the DVE KEY button which can be selected as AUX
output. Signals can be assigned at the SETUP – OUTPUT menu.
Press the SHIFT button in the menu select section to turn on the button light, and then press
the STATUS(SETUP) button to display the SETUP menu.
Turn the F1 control to select OUTPUT. Either press the F1 control, or press the DOWN
button to display the SETUP – OUTPUT menu.
Turn the F1 control in the SETUP – OUTPUT menu to select OUT parameter line.
In the OUT line, turn the F3 control to select the DVE KEY output signal. Press F3 to register
the setting.

Selectable Signals for DVE KEY


Setting Signal
PGM PGM bus DVE KEY
PST PST bus DVE KEY
ME_A A bus DVE KEY output
ME_B B bus DVE KEY output
KEY1 KEY1 bus DVE KEY
KEY2 KEY2 bus DVE KEY
D KEY1 DVE channel 1 KEY output
D KEY2 DVE channel 2 KEY output
D KEY3 (SD mode only) DVE channel 3 KEY output
D KEY4 (SD mode only) DVE channel 4 KEY output
ME_KEY KEY composite output for three keyers

CLEAN
CLEAN signal can be routed to any AUX output. Either the only background signal or
background with KEY1 and KEY2 signals can be selected for CLEAN output at the SETUP –
OUTPUT menu as in the procedure below.
Press the SHIFT button in the menu select section to turn on the button light, and then press
the STATUS(SETUP) button to display the SETUP menu.
Turn the F1 control to select OUTPUT. Either press the F1 control, or press the DOWN
button to display the SETUP – OUTPUT menu.
Turn the F1 control in the SETUP – OUTPUT menu to select OUT parameter line.
In the OUT line, turn the F2 control to select the CLEAN output signal. Press F2 to register
the setting.

If set to ON: M/E + KEY1 + KEY2 (DSK not included.)


If set to OFF: M/E output only (default setting)

35
INPUT PREV output (through output)
Thru output (output without a signal processing delay) for input signals (IN1-16, UTL-IN) is
possible for INPUT PREV output. The INPUT PREV output can be selected from the AUX/KEY
bus or menu.

Selecting with the AUX/KEY bus


Press the INPUT PREV button in the Bus Select section to turn on the button light.
Select the signal to be used in the AUX/KEY bus column. (The BLACK, WHITE, MATT1, and
MATT2 signals cannot be selected.)

Selecting with the menu


Press the SHIFT button in the menu select section to turn on the button light, and then press
the STATUS(SETUP) button to display the SETUP menu.
Turn F1 to select BUS CTRL. Either press F1 or press the DOWN button to display the
SETUP - BUS CONTROL menu.
Turn F1 in the SETUP-BUS CONTROL menu to select INPUT PREV line.
In the INPUT PREV line, turn F2 to select the signal.

36
7. Transition Operations
The HVS-1000HS switchers are capable of performing several different types of transitions.
Transition features using HVS-1000EOU are listed below.

Black transitions
Background CUT, MIX, NAM, FAM, WIPE, and DVE transitions
DSK CUT and MIX transitions
KEY1 and KEY2 CUT, MIX, WIPE, and DVE transitions (option)
Next transition layers are setup in the next transition section.
Transitions using the AUTO button or the fader lever
Each key status can be checked by the LED on the KEY AUTO button.
100 WIPE preset patterns available in standard configuration
120 DVE preset patterns available (some available as options) and 50 user patterns
registable.
WIPE transitions can be used simultaneously with background, KEY1 and KEY2 (the same
pattern applied).
DVE transitions can be used simultaneously (different patterns available) in background,
KEY1, KEY2. The available DVE channels (how many layers are available) depend on the
system signal format (HD or SD) and the number of DVE boards (one or two). Up to 2
channels in HD mode and up to 4 channels in SD mode.
BKGD KEY1 KEY2 DSK BLACK

TRANSITION
NOR NOR/REV REV FADER LIM SEQ LINK
RATE

MIX MIX MIX


WIPE WIPE WIPE
DVE DVE DVE
KEY1
FAM BLACK
OVER TRANS
NAM ON ON

BKGD KEY1 KEY2


CUT
NEXT TRANSITION

MIX WIPE DVE


(FAM) (NAM) MIX

TRANSITION TYPE

CUT DSK
AUTO
TRANS TRANS

Transition Control Section

Item Description
A Transition direction buttons for WIPE and DVE transitions
B Fader limit ON/OFF button and Sequence link ON/OFF button.
C Transition information displays and KEY1 OVER button for key priority setting.
D Bus selection buttons for next transition setup
E Transition type selection buttons for next transition setup
F AUTO transition button for BKGD, KEY1, and KEY2.
G CUT transition button for BKGD, KEY1, and KEY2.
H Transition fader lever for BKGD, KEY1, and KEY2.
I DSK transition section.
J Transition rate information display
K Black transition button.

37
7-1. BLACK Transitions
Pressing BLACK TRANS button in the Transition Control section will initiate a fade to (or fade
from) black of whatever layers are currently on the program line (background and keys).
Pressing the button again after the transition is initiated will cause the transition to be performed
in reverse from the point where when the button was pressed.
Set the transition time in the menu, if necessary. (Refer to section 7-4-3.)
Press the BLACK TRANS button to perform the black transition.

BKGD KEY1 KEY2 DSK BLACK

TRANSITION
NOR NOR/REV REV FADER LIM SEQ LINK
RATE

MIX MIX MIX


WIPE WIPE WIPE
DVE DVE DVE
KEY1
FAM BLACK
OVER TRANS
NAM ON ON

BKGD KEY1 KEY2


CUT
NEXT TRANSITION
BLACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MATT DVE SHIFT
MIX WIPE DVE
(FAM) (NAM) MIX

TRANSITION TYPE

CUT DSK
BLACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MATT DVE SHIFT AUTO
TRANS TRANS

7-2. DSK Transitions


DSK transitions will only transition the highest priority key layer on the program line. It cannot be
used to transition lower layers. Also note that DSK transition is performed as automatic CUT or
MIX type transition. It cannot be manually performed using fader lever.

First make settings for a key signal layer in the DSK menu or in the BUS SELECT and
KEY/AUX bus sections. (Refer to section 11-1 “ Luminance Key Setup" and section 11-2
“BUS Key Setup" for more details.)
To select the transition type, press the CUT or
BKGD KEY1 KEY2 DSK BLACK
MIX button to turn on.
TRANSITION
NOR NOR/REV REV FADER LIM SEQ LINK
RATE

When performing the MIX transition and if MIX MIX MIX


WIPE WIPE WIPE
needed, transition time and fader limit settings DVE
FAM
DVE DVE
KEY1
BLACK
OVER
should be made in the DSK or TRANSITION NAM ON ON
TRANS

menu. (Refer to section 7-4-1 “Fader Limit" and BKGD KEY1 KEY2
section 7-4-3 “Transition Rate" for more details). NEXT TRANSITION
CUT

During the DSK transition the DSK lamp will light WIPE DVE
MIX (FAM) (NAM)
on and transition time is displayed in the MIX

TRANSITION TYPE
Transition Rate information section.
CUT DSK
AUTO
Press the DSK TRANS button in the DSK TRANS TRANS

transition section to perform the DSK transition.

IMPORTANT
DSK display to preview output can be switched on and off by selecting in the menu.
ON/OFF are selected using the DSK parameter block of the PREV SEL line in the
TRANSITION menu. (The default setting is OFF.)

38
7-3. BKGD, KEY1, and KEY2 Transitions
The BKGD, KEY1, and KEY2 transitions can be setup
and performed in the NEXT TRANSITION section by
selecting the transition type and layer (bus) to be
transitioned (next transition layer), and then using the
AUTO button or fader lever. Simultaneous transitions NOR NOR/REV REV FADER LIM SEQ LINK
of multiple layers are possible. The ON/OFF AIR status
and transition type setting can be verified by checking MIX MIX MIX
the transition information indicator at the top of the WIPE WIPE WIPE
NEXT TRANSITION section. DVE DVE DVE
KEY1
FAM
OVER
Verifying ON/OFF AIR NAM ON ON
The buttons in the NEXT TRANSITION section are lit
red when ON AIR (BKGD buttons are always red) and
BKGD KEY1 KEY2
are lit orange when OFF AIR. For KEY1 and KEY2, the
ON lamps over the buttons are also lit red.
NEXT TRANSITION
Pressing the KEY1 OVER button switches the KEY1
and KEY2 layer position. The button is lit when the WIPE DVE
MIX
KEY1 layer is above KEY2, and the button is unlit when (FAM) (NAM)
it is under.
TRANSITION TYPE

Verifying the transition type


The transition information displays over the BKGD, CUT
KEY1, and KEY2 buttons allows you to check which AUTO
TRANS
transition type is currently set for each bus. For
detailed settings of each transition, refer to the sections
below.

7-3-1. CUT Transition


Select the bus button to be used for the background transition from the PGM/PST bus.
The bus button that is at on-air turns red, and the bus button for the next output is orange.
Select the signal layer to be transitioned in the NEXT TRANSITION section. When
performing multiple transitions, press all of the desired buttons simultaneously to turn on.
Press the CUT TRANS button to perform the CUT transition.

BKGD KEY1 KEY2 DSK BLACK

TRANSITION
NOR NOR/REV REV FADER LIM SEQ LINK
RATE

MIX MIX MIX


WIPE WIPE WIPE
DVE DVE DVE
KEY1
FAM BLACK
OVER TRANS
NAM ON ON

BKGD KEY1 KEY2


CUT
NEXT TRANSITION
BLACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MATT DVE SHIFT
MIX WIPE DVE
(FAM) (NAM) MIX

TRANSITION TYPE

CUT DSK
BLACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MATT DVE SHIFT AUTO
TRANS TRANS

39
7-3-2. MIX, FAM and NAM
Background bus mix transitions can be performed as either normal, FAM (full additive mix) or
NAM (non additive mix). Of these three, picture elements are mixed differently than standard
during the FAM and NAM transitions.
In the case of normal MIX transition, the new picture (next signal output) will fade in (signal
level increases) as the previous picture fades out and off (signal level decreases). Signal
levels change proportionally to each other and will be equally present at the electrical
midpoint of the transition.
In the case of a FAM transition, the picture elements being mixed between stay at the
same 100% level throughout performance of the transition. One signal level does not
decrease proportional to the others increase.
In the case of a NAM transition, the picture elements stay at the same level but, in addition,
only the brightest parts of each of the pictures being mixed will be passed by the switcher and
output.

IMPORTANT
FAM and NAM types can be applied to only background transitions.

Follow the procedure below to perform MIX, FAM, or NAM transitions.


When performing background transition, select the bus button to be used for the
transition from the PGM/PST bus. The bus button that is at on-air turns red, and the bus
button for the next output is orange. When performing key transition, set up a key signal
layer in the each KEY menu or in the BUS SELECT and KEY/AUX bus sections. (Refer to
section 11-1 “ Luminance Key Setup" and section 11-2 “BUS Key Setup" for more details.)
Select the signal layer to be transitioned in the NEXT TRANSITION section. When
performing multiple transitions, press all of the desired buttons simultaneously to turn on.
To select the MIX transition type, press the MIX button in the TRANSITION TYPE section.
To select the FAM transition type, with holding down the MIX, press the WIPE button and
to select the NAM transition type, with holding down the MIX, press the DVE button. Verify
that the transition type is correctly set for the signal layer in the Transition Information
displays.
If needed, transition time and fader limit settings should be made in the TRANSITION
menu. (Refer to section 7-4-1 “Fader Limit" and section 7-4-3 “Transition Rate" for more
details).
Press the AUTO button or move the fader lever in the NEXT TRANSITION section to
perform the MIX (FAM or NAM) transition. During the auto transition the corresponding
signal layer lamp will light on and transition time is displayed in the Transition Rate
information section.

IMPORTANT
The FAM or NAM transition cannot be performed when the LINE DVE (See section 9.)
or the Forced Background function (See section10-3-1.) is assigned to the selected
bus.

40
7-3-3. WIPE Transition
Follow the procedure below to perform WIPE transitions.
When performing background transition, select the bus button to be used for the
transition from the PGM/PST bus. The bus button that is at on-air turns red, and the bus
button for the next output is orange. When performing key transition, set up a key signal
layer in the each KEY menu or in the BUS SELECT and KEY/AUX bus sections. (Refer to
section 11-1 “ Luminance Key Setup" and section 11-2 “BUS Key Setup" for more details.)
Select the signal layer to be transitioned in the NEXT TRANSITION section. When
performing multiple transitions, press all of the desired buttons simultaneously to turn on.

NOTE
WIPE transitions can be used simultaneously with background, KEY1 and KEY2,
however, have to use the same pattern.

Press the WIPE button in the TRANSITION TYPE section to set the transition type. Verify
that the WIPE is correctly set for the selected signal layer(s) in the Transition Information
displays.
Once the WIPE button is pressed to turn on, WIPE PATTERN menu will appear on the
menu screen. Use F5 control to select the WIPE pattern to be used. You can also use the
Direct Pattern function to select the pattern quickly. (Refer to section 7-5 “Selecting a
Pattern " for more details about pattern selection.)

NOTE
If you want to change the aspect ratio or starting position, etc., see section 7-6
“Modifying A WIPE Pattern.”

If necessary, use the DIRECTION buttons (NOR, NOR/REV and REV) to set the
transition direction.
If necessary, transition time and fader limit settings should be made in the TRANSITION
menu. (Refer to section 7-4-1 “Fader Limit" and section 7-4-3 “Transition Rate" for more
details).
Press the AUTO button or move the fader lever in the NEXT TRANSITION section to
perform the WIPE transition. During the auto transition the corresponding signal layer
lamp will light on and transition time is displayed in the Transition Rate information
section.

41
7-3-4. DVE Transition
Follow the procedure below to perform DVE transitions.
When performing background transition, select the bus button to be used for the
transition from the PGM/PST bus. The bus button that is at on-air turns red, and the bus
button for the next output is orange. When performing key transition, set up a key signal
layer in the each KEY menu or in the BUS SELECT and KEY/AUX bus sections. (Refer to
section 11-1 “ Luminance Key Setup" and section 11-2 “BUS Key Setup" for more details.)
Select the signal layer to be transitioned in the NEXT TRANSITION section. When
performing multiple transitions, press all of the desired buttons simultaneously to turn on.
Press the DVE button in the TRANSITION TYPE section to set the transition type. Verify
that the DVE is correctly set for the selected signal layer(s) in the Transition Information
displays.

NOTE
DVE transitions can be used simultaneously with background, KEY1 and KEY2, using
different patterns.
If the all available DVE channels (layers) are used, pressing the DVE button cannot
light on the button. Press the DVE button again to light on after changing the KEY1 or
KEY2 transition type from DVE to another or disabling the LINE DVE. (See section
9-2 “DVE Options” for more details about available DVE channels.)

Once the DVE button is pressed to turn on, DVE PATTERN menu will appear on the
menu screen. Use F5 control to select the DVE pattern to be used. You can also use the
Direct Pattern function to select the pattern quickly. (Refer to section 7-5 “Selecting a
Pattern " for more details about pattern selection.)

NOTE
If you want to change the starting position or rotation, add a border or an edge, etc.,
see section 7-7 ”DVE Pattern Modify.” If you want to use a user pattern, see section 8
“User Patterns".

If necessary, use the DIRECTION buttons (NOR, NOR/REV and REV) to set the
transition direction.
If necessary, transition time and fader limit settings should be made in the TRANSITION
menu. (Refer to section 7-4-1 "Fader Limit" and section 7-4-3 "Transition Rate" for more
details).
Press the AUTO button or move the fader lever in the NEXT TRANSITION section to
perform the DVE transition. During the auto transition the corresponding signal layer lamp
will light on and transition time is displayed in the Transition Rate information section.

IMPORTANT
The DVE pattern transition cannot be performed when the LINE DVE (See section 9.)
or the Forced Background function (See section10-3-1.) is assigned to the selected
bus.

42
DVE Transition Direction Control
Like WIPE patterns, DVE patterns also enable the transition direction to be changed using
the NOR, NOR/REV, and REV buttons in the transition section.
Additionally, in case of DVE patterns the transition direction can be also changed using the
menu. This feature allows you to modify or fine-tune a DVE pattern in the reverse way at a
keyframe level. To set a DVE transition direction to reverse, change the KF DIR item of DVE
MODE to REVERS (reverse) from NORMAL in the SETUP - DVE SETUP menu as shown
below. Once the transition direction is set to reverse in the menu, pattern icons both in the
menu and the transition section will be changed to the reverse ones.
Press the SHIFT button in the menu select section to light on. Then press the
STATUS(SETUP) button to display the SETUP top menu.
Turn F1 to select the cursor to DVE SETUP. Press F1 or DOWN button to display the
SETUP-DVE SETUP menu.
In the SETUP-DVE SETUP menu turn F2 to select NORMAL or REVERS for the KF DIR
item.

Endpoint Processing for DVE Transitions


In DVE operations, differences in video delay when entering and exiting DVE effects can
cause the video to appear choppy. This choppiness can be reduced by menu setting so that
the DVE effect always exits at the transition start and end points. (Note that, however, trails
and certain other transitions must fade simultaneously with the end of the transition.)
Endpoint processing is turned on and off by the EDGE item of the DVE MODE line in the
SETUP-DVE SETUP menu.

PRESET PATTERN CROP


Preset crop settings (trimming) can be made for all DVE preset patterns. In addition to
uniform cropping on the top, bottom, left, and right (ALL item), cropping can also be
performed separately for the top and bottom (T+B item) and right and left (L+R item). These
settings are made P PAT CROP line in the SETUP - DVE SETUP menu. After completing the
settings, press the F5 control to confirm the settings.

IMPORTANT
Individual crop settings can also be made for each DVE pattern in the DVE MODIFY
menu. For details, see section 9-4-3 “CROP.”

DVE FILTER MODE (DVE Ver.2.05)


The anti-aliasing filter is applied to the input video signals before processing the DVE effects.
Two levels of filtering are selectable: MODE1 and MODE2. Select a suitable mode for your
images. (See below.)

MODE1: A stronger anti-alias filter. It smoothes out rough edges or jaggies that often
appear on the edges of 3D geometry resizes to improve the downscaling results.
It works best with flat-color and sharp-edged images such as animations or color
bars.
MODE2: A soft anti-alias filter. It also reduces color aliasing in images, however,,
maintains good image sharpness. It is suitable for soft images such as
landscapes.

43
7-4. Additional Transition Settings
7-4-1. Fader Limit
The fader limit setting determines how far your transition does or does not proceed
electrically. When performing transitions (mix or other) there may be times when you want
the transition to the next signal to only complete to a certain degree instead of fully switching
from one picture to another. In this case, you will need to limit the transition range of the fader
lever process. The fader limit setting procedure for each signal layer is described below.

Setting Fader Limit Values


The fader limit for each signal layer can be set in the following parameters in the menu.
Signal layer
Setting Parameter
(Transition type)
Sets at DSK of the FADER LIMIT line in TRANSITION menu
DSK (MIX)
or LEVEL of the KEY TRANS line in DSK menu.
BKGD (MIX, FAM,
Sets at BKGD of the FADER LIMIT line in TRANSITION menu.
NAM, WIPE, and DVE)
KEY1 (MIX, WIPE, and Sets at KEY1 of the FADER LIMIT line in TRANSITION menu
DVE) or LEVEL of the KEY TRANS line in KEY1 menu.
KEY2 (MIX, WIPE, and Sets at KEY2 of the FADER LIMIT line in TRANSITION menu
DVE) or LEVEL of the KEY TRANS line in KEY2 menu.

QUICK SET
You can quick set fader limit by first physically setting the fader lever to the point that
you want a translation to finish. With the fader at this position, press and briefly hold
down the FADER LIM button. This will become the current electrical value at the fader
position as the FADER LIMIT setting.

Fader Limit ON/OFF Settings


The fader limit ON/OFF setting for each signal layer should be done as follows in the table
below.
Signal layer
Setting parameter or button
(Transition type)
DSK (MIX) Sets ON/OFF for LIMIT of the KEY TRANS line in DSK menu.
BKGD (MIX, FAM, Press to turn on/off the FADER LIM button in the TRANSITION
NAM, WIPE, and DVE) section.
Press to turn on/off the FADER LIM button in the TRANSITION
KEY1 (MIX, WIPE, and
section or sets ON/OFF for LIMIT of the KEY TRANS line in KEY1
DVE)
menu.
Press to turn on/off the FADER LIM button in the TRANSITION
KEY2 (MIX, WIPE, and
section or sets ON/OFF for LIMIT of the KEY TRANS line in KEY2
DVE)
menu.

44
7-4-2. Fader Operational Settings
Transition Operation Settings for Fader Lever
The following two types of fader lever operations can be selected for the transition level in the
SETUP-MU SETUP menu. To do this, turn F2 in the TRANS CTRL parameter line of the
menu.
TRANS CTRL Setting Description
Detects the transition level using the normalized operation of the
REG (regular)
fader lever. (Default).
Detects the transition level using the absolute position of the
ABU (absolute)
fader lever.
Gain and Offset for Fader Lever
The GAIN and OFFSET for the fader lever can also be adjusted in the SETUP-OU SETUP
menu. Turn F2 (for GAIN) and F3 (for OFFSET) in the FADER line of the menu to adjust the
fader lever response.

7-4-3. Transition Rate


The transition rate setting determines how long your transition takes in picture frames to
electrically complete. This setting will only be applied during automatic switchover transitions.
(Factory default is 30 frames.) If you are manually performing the transition by moving the
fader lever, the procedure to do this is as follows.

Verifying the Transition Rate Settings


You can check the transition rate setting of the next transition layer in the Transition Rate
Information display at the top-right of the Transition Control section. In the Transition Rate
Information display each lamp turns on/off to indicate that the corresponding signal layer is
currently in transition. Current transition time can be also viewed in real time. When
performing the multiple layer transition, the priority for transition time display will be given in
order of Background, KEY1 and KEY2.

BKGD KEY1 KEY2 DSK BLACK

TRANSITION
RATE

Setting Transition Rates


The transition rate for each signal layer can be set in the following parameters in the menu.
Signal layer
Setting parameter
(Transition type)
Black transition Sets at BLACK of the TRANS RATE2 line in TRANSITION menu.
Sets at DSK of the TRANS RATE2 line in TRANSITION menu
DSK (MIX)
or RATE of the KEY TRANS line in DSK menu.
BKGD (MIX, FAM,
Sets at BKGD of the TRANS RATE1 line in TRANSITION menu
NAM, WIPE, and DVE)
KEY1 (MIX, WIPE, and Sets at KEY1 of the TRANS RATE1 line in TRANSITION menu
DVE) or RATE of the KEY TRANS line in KEY1 menu.
KEY2 (MIX, WIPE, and Sets at KEY2 of the TRANS RATE1 line in TRANSITION menu
DVE) or RATE of the KEY TRANS line in KEY2 menu.

45
OPERATIONAL NOTE
You can set the transition rate to be displayed in either
seconds or frames. This setting is made at RATE of the
OU CTRL line in the SETUP- OU MODE menu. Default
setting is SEC. If you set to FRAME, a figure similar to at Second (first no.)
right should be displayed at the transition section. Frames (second no.)

Transition rate setting will be applied during background and key transitions whenever
AUTO button in the transition section is pressed to initiate automatic transition
between output pictures. When moving fader lever to perform transition manually, rate
will not be applied.

7-4-4. AUTO Button Operational Setting


The AUTO transition behavior when the AUTO button is pressed again during transition can
be selected among the following three types. The setting is done turning F2 in the AUTO line
of the SETUP-MU MODE menu.

AUTO Setting Description


PAUSE Suspends the transition.
CUT Terminates the transition.
RETURN Brings the transition back to the starting point.

46
7-5. Selecting A Pattern
The patterns currently selected by BKGD, KEY1, and KEY2 can be checked in the pattern
information box in the information section of the menu screen. A list of type settings can also be
checked in the TRANSITION menu. The currently selected patterns can be changed in the
TRANSITION menu.
Normally, a pattern list is displayed for selecting for the WIPE pattern and DVE pattern in the
menu. However, the direct pattern function can also be used for even easier selection of
patterns.

7-5-1. Checking and Setting Patterns


Pattern information box in menu screen
The currently selected patterns are displayed in realtime in the pattern information box in the
information section of the menu screen. If you are modifying the selected pattern, the
character “M” is followed by a pattern number. (For example, No: M001)

WIPE PAT No:001 BKGD PAT No.:100


KEY1 PAT No:150 KEY2 PAT No:401

Transition menu
Press the SHIFT button in the menu select section to light the button, and then press TRANS
(PATTERN SEL) button to jump to the PATTERN SEL line. The currently selected pattern is
displayed as an icon in the PATTERN SEL line, and it can be changed by turning F2 to F5.

Parameter
Operation Description
name
WIPE F2 Currently selected WIPE pattern
BKGD F3 DVE pattern currently selected for background
KEY1 F4 DVE pattern currently selected for KEY1
KEY2 F5 DVE pattern currently selected for KEY2

7-5-2. Pattern List Pop-up Menu


Pressing the WIPE button in the TRANSITION TYPE section displays the WIPE PATTERN
list.
Pressing the DVE button in the TRANSITION TYPE section displays the DVE PATTERN list.
In the pattern list screen, turn the F5 control to select the pattern. To move between pages,
either press the UP/DOWN button or turn F5 while holding it down.

WIPE PATTERN SELECT BUTTON [ ] CTRL:[F5]

000 001 002 003 004

005 006 007 008 009

010 011 012 013 014

015 016 017 018 019

F5
47
7-5-3. Direct Pattern Function
Direct pattern is a function that enables WIPE patterns and DVE patterns to be stored to the
0 to 9 buttons on the keypad for direct recall. Up to 10 direct patterns each can be stored for
the WIPE patterns and DVE patterns, for a total of 20 patterns. The SHIFT button is used to
switch between WIPE and DVE patterns. Frequently-used WIPE patterns and DVE patterns
can be stored as direct patterns for operating convenience.

Storing direct patterns


Press the DIRECT PATT button on the keypad. The keypad changes to direct pattern
mode, and then the DIRECT PATT button, STORE button, and the 0 to 9 buttons where
direct patterns are already stored light up.
The WIPE PATTERN list is displayed in the menu screen. To switch to and display the
DVE PATTERN list, press the SHIFT button.

SEQ EVENT DVE CH DIRECT PATT

7 8 9 STORE

4 5 6 RECALL

1 2 3 +/-

0 CLEAR
(CANCEL)
SHIFT
(PAUSE)
ENTER
(PLAY)

Press the button (0 to 9) where you want to store the pattern while holding down the
STORE button on the keypad.
Turn the F5 control in the direct pattern select menu in the menu screen to select the
pattern to store. To move between pages, turn the press the UP/DOWN button or turn the
F5 control while holding it down. Pressing the F5 control stores the selected pattern to a
button on the keypad.

Selecting direct patterns


Press the button to select the bus that you want to use in the NEXT TRANSITION section
of the transition section.
Press the DIRECT PATT button on the keypad.
The icon for the stored WIPE direct pattern is displayed in the menu screen. Each icon
corresponds to one of the 0 to 9 button on the keypad. Press the keypad button
corresponding to the pattern that you want to use. The pattern is selected, and the bus
changes to WIPE type.

IMPORTANT
To switch to and select a DVE pattern, press the SHIFT button.

48
7-6. Modifying A WIPE Pattern
The WIPE preset patterns (nos. 0 to 99) can be modified.
The WIPE pattern is selected, and then the Modify effects are set in the WIPE MODIFY menu.
In the WIPE MODIFY menu, settings can be made for the pattern currently selected in the
transition section. These Modify patterns can be used in the same way as preset patterns.

7-6-1. Making Modify Settings


Press the WIPE(BORDER) button in the menu select section to display the WIPE
MODIFY menu.
Select a WIPE pattern to be modified. (See section 7-5 “Selecting A Pattern" for pattern
selection.)
Make settings in the menu to set the effect that you want to use. To change the position,
aspect, angle etc, turn F1 to select WIPE POS line and set each parameter using other
function controls. To add a border to the pattern, turn F1 to select BRDR-COLOR line. To
add an edge to the pattern, turn F1 to select EDGE-TYPE and/or EDGE-MODE
parameter line.

IMPORTANT
Modify settings in the WIPE MODIFY menu are saved and kept after selecting another
pattern. If you want all WIPE pattern modify settings to the factory default, initialize the
WIPE MODIFY menu. (See section 7-6-2. "Initializing WIPE MODIFY menu"
following.)
Important modify data should be backed up by saving to event memory or to the CF
card. Refer to secion 15 “Event Memory" and section 17-2 "Saving Data to CF Cards"
for backing up the data.

7-6-2. Initializing WIPE MODIFY Menu


To initialize the WIPE MODIFY menu, use any one of the two procedures below.

Using INIT Parameter in the WIPE MODIFY Menu


Turn F5 in the WIPE MODI line of the WIPE MODIFY menu to select POS, EDGE, BORDER
or ALL. Then press and hold down the F5 for a while. A "beep" will be heard and the selected
parameters in the menu return to factory default.

Using WIPE POS and DEF Buttons in the Joystick Section


When using a modified pattern, press the WIPE POS button next to the joystick to light on.
Then press and hold down the DEF button for a while. All settings in the WIPE MODIFY
menu return to factory default.

49
7-6-3. WIPE MODIFY Menu
Parameter line Parameter Description (Settings)
SELECT Selects a WIPE pattern.
WIPE MODI
INIT Initializes the DVE MODIFY menu.
MOSAIC, MONO, PAINT,
TYPE Selects sub effect type.
NEGA, SEPIA
Sets level for the sub effect 1-16 (Applied only for
EFFECT LEVEL
selected at TYPE. MOSAIC and PAINT.)
SAT/HUE Sets color (sepia) of the sub effect selected at TYPE
INVERT Sets invert ON/OFF the sub effect selected at TYPE.
POS X
Changes X and Y origin position.
POS Y
WIPE POS (*1) ANGLE Changes offset angle of wipe performance.
Sets how softness of wipe Hard edge applied if set to
SOFT
edge. lower than zero
MULTI-X Sets number of wipe repeats in horizontal / vertical
MULTI/ASPECT MULTI-Y direction.
ASPECT Sets aspect ratio. (*3)
SELECT Sets application of border effect ON / OFF.
BORDER SIGNAL Sets which signal used for border effect.
WIDTH Sets border width.
SAT
LUM
BRDR-COLOR Sets border color.
HUE
COLOR
OFF: No shape effect
Applies a shape to SQU: Square tooth edge
TYPE
EDGE-TYPE the edge. SAW: Sawtooth edge
RIP: Ripple edge
MODE Sets which directions edge effect applied in.
AMP (*2) Sets magnitude of edge shape.
EDGE-MODE FREQ (*2) Sets how often edge shape base unit repeats.
POS Sets shape position on wipe.
* Available parameters vary by pattern. If NONE is shown in the menu, the related parameter cannot be
used for modifying that pattern.
(*1) You can directly access the WIPE POSITION parameters by pressing the WIPE POS button in joystick
section. Press the button twice t rapidly allows the user to directly access the POSITION parameter line in
the menu.
(*2) The AMP or FREQ parameter must be set carefully, because it may cause flicker noise.
(*3) Setting too higher or lower level for ASPECT may give an inclination of the wipe. In this case, set SOFT
lower than zero (WIPE Ver.7.0 or higher).

50
7-7. DVE Pattern Modify
The DVE preset patterns (nos. 100 to 219) can be modified. The DVE pattern is selected, and
then the Modify effects are set in the DVE MODIFY menu. In the DVE MODIFY menu, settings
can be made for the pattern currently selected in the transition section. These Modify patterns
can be used in the same way as preset patterns.

7-7-1. Making Modify Settings


Press the DVE(FREEZE) button in the menu select section to display the DVE MODIFY
menu.
Select a DVE pattern to be modified. (See section 7-5 “Selecting A Pattern" for pattern
selection.)
Make settings in the menu to set the effect that you want to use. Refer to section 9-4
“ DVE MODIFY Menu" for more details about DVE modify settings.

Selecting a Channel
The DVE preset patterns in the number 200 to 219 range are two-channel patterns. The
channels must be selected when these patterns are modified. Channel selection can be
made in the following two ways

<Using the DVE MODIFY menu>


Press the DVE button in the BKGD transition section to turn on the button light. (The
two-channel patterns can only be assigned to BKGD transitions.)
Press the DVE MODI button to display the DVE MODIFY menu.
Turn F1 to align the cursor with the DVE MODI line. Turn F3 to select the bus where the
DVE is assigned from PGM, PST, KEY1 or KEY2 under the CHAN (channel) item.
Modify the selected channel of the pattern.

<Using the keypad>


Press the DVE button in the BKGD transition section to light up.
The DVE CH button above the keypad to light up. The channel selection window will be
pop-up on the menu display.
Press 7 (DVE PGM) to light up orange if you want to modify the channel assigned to the
PGM bus. Press 4 (DVE PST) to light up orange if you want to modify the channel
assigned to the PST bus.
Press the DVE MODI button in the menu select section to display the DVE MODIFY
menu.
Modify the selected channel of the pattern.

IMPORTANT
Some modify settings in the DVE MODIFY menu are saved and kept after selecting
another pattern. If you want all DVE pattern modify settings to the factory default,
initialize the DVE MODIFY menu. (See section 7-7-2. "Initializing DVE MODIFY menu"
following.)
Important modify data should be backed up by saving to event memory or to the CF
card. Refer to secion 14 “Event Memory" and section 17-2 "Saving Data to CF Cards"
for backing up the data.

51
DVE MODIFY Settings Preserved After Selecting Another Pattern
The modify data in the following parameter lines are saved and kept after selecting another
pattern.

Parameter line Parameters


BORDER WIDTH-X, WIDTH-Y, WIDTH-XY, ENABLE
BDR COLOR SAT, LUM, HUE
SOFT EDGE BDR-X, BDR-Y, BDR-XY, EDGE
TRAIL TYPE, LENGTH
SHADOW SHADOW, LEVEL
FREEZE FREEZE, STRB, NEGA
DEFOCUS SELECT, LEVEL, MOSAIC
PAINT Y-LV, C-LV, Y/C-LV
MONO COLOR SAT, HUE, SELECT
HILITE COLOR SAT, LUM, HUE

52
7-7-2. Initializing DVE MODIFY Menu
To initialize the WIPE MODIFY menu, use any one of the two procedures below.

Using INIT Parameter in the DVE MODIFY Menu


Turn F5 in the DVE MODI line of the DVE MODIFY menu to select POS, ROT, CROP,
WARP, BORDER, SHDW, SUBEFF, HILITE, or ALL. Then press and hold down the F5 for a
while. A "beep" will be heard and the selected parameters in the menu return to factory
default.
Using DVE POS (or DVE ROT) and DEF Buttons in the Joystick Section
When using a modified pattern, press the DVE POS (or DVE ROT) button next to the joystick
to light on. Then press and hold down the DEF button for a while. All settings in the DVE
MODIFY menu return to factory default.

Using a USER button


At first assign the WIPE MODIFY RESET function to a desired USER button, (See section
4-3-3 "User Buttons” for details.) and then press the respective USER button. The selected
WIPE pattern will go back to factory default settings.

7-7-3. DVE Pattern Modify Setting Example


This section uses DVE pattern no. 118 to illustrate the modification procedure for changing
the starting position.
Press the DVE(FREEZE) button in the transition section to display DVEMODIFY menu.
In the DVE MODI line, turn F2 to select DVE pattern button (no. 118 in this example) that
you want to modify. You can also choose the pattern by pressing the DVE button in the
NEXT TRANSITION section then selecting the pattern in the DVE PATTERN menu.
Turn F1 to select DVE POS parameter line.
In the DVE POS line, turn F2 and/or F3 to move the starting position of the transition. In
this example 500 is set for each entry in POSITION (X, Y).

Keyframe before change Keyframe after change

IMPORTANT
Press the DVE POS button in the joystick section to enable setting of POSITION (X,Y)
for DVE using the joystick without opening the menu. Double-clicking the DVE POS
button opens the DVE MODIFY menu and accesses the DVE POS line directly.

No. 118 is a pattern where the image changes by shrinking towards the center. If a
transition is executed in this state, the entire screen will converge at the top right of the
screen.
PGM
PST

Preset pattern Before modification After modification


(Normal direction) (Reverse direction)

53
7-7-4. Saving Modified DVE pattern As A User Pattern
The modified DVE preset pattern can be saved as a User pattern. Follow the procedure
below to save the modified data as a user pattern.
Modify a DVE preset pattern.
Press the DVE(FREEZE) button in the menu select section to access the DVE MODIFY
menu.
Move the cursor to the DVE MODI line. Turn the control F4 to change to the desired user
pattern number (401 to 450) from OFF.
Press F4 to register the modified pattern to the selected user pattern.

54
8. User Patterns
8-1. About the User Patterns
You will have a number of preprogrammed DVE patterns that can be immediately called up and
applied to operation. In addition, the user can make and store up to 50 user effects patterns.
User patterns can be also modified using the DVE MODIFY menu in the same way as preset
patterns.

The procedure for creating and executing user patterns is shown below.

Select user pattern

Number of stored 50 patterns


Modify pattern user patterns max.
Modify keyframes Add/Delete Number of 50
keyframes keyframes in one keyframes
pattern max.
Total available
704
keyframes in all
keyframes
Check user pattern operation user patterns

Assign to bus/Execute

DVE Pattern Data Structure

USER PATTERN

DVE EFFECT CH1 DVE EFFECT CH2


Max. 50 Keyframes Max. 50 Keyframes

KEY FRAME KEY FRAME

IMPORTANT
The total number of available keyframes in the user pattern is a maximum of 704
keyframes. If no keyframes are available, keyframes cannot be added to the user
pattern.

55
8-2. Editing User Patterns
User patterns are edited using the USER PATTERN menu and keypad.

IMPORTANT
Selecting the user pattern number under the SELECT parameter of the USER
PATTERN menu changes the OU to USER PATTERN MODE.
And pressing the DVE CH button on the keypad changes the keypad to USER
PATTERN Editing mode. When the keypad is mentioned in this section, it does not
refer to the normal keypad for numeric input but the USER PATTERN Editing keypad.

Refer
Operation item Operation section Operation to
1 Open the USER PATTERN Menu selection Press the USER (SEQ) button.
menu section
Select the number under the 8-2-1
2 Select the user pattern USER SELECT parameter (change OU
PATTERN menu to USER PATTERN MODE).
Cancel overwrite protect USER Set PROTECT parameter to 8-2-2
setting PATTERN menu OFF.
Change the keypad to USER Press the DVE CH button so
PATTERN Editing mode (*1) On keypad that it lights orange. A pop-up is 8-2-3
displayed in the menu screen.
Keypad Press 7 (CH1) or 4 (CH2).
Select channel USER 8-2-4
PATTERN menu Select the CH SEL parameter.

PGM/PST bus Use PGM or PST (press the


Assign bus column DVE button for each bus
column) 8-2-5
Create new Keypad Press STORE (KF ADD).
keyframe
Use +/- to move in the forward
Keypad direction, and SHIFT and +/- to
Select keyframe move in the reverse direction. 8-2-6
USER Use the KF SEL parameter to
PATTERN menu select.
3
Edit Add keyframe Keypad Press STORE (KF ADD).
pattern Insert keyframe Keypad Press 9 (KF INSERT). 8-2-7
Overwrite keyframe Keypad Press RECALL (KF
OVERWRITE).
Delete keyframe Keypad Press CLEAR and then ENTER. 8-2-9
Copy/Paste Keypad Press 2 (KF COPY) to copy and 8-2-8
keyframe 3 (KF PASTE) to paste.
USER Use the KF DUR parameter to
KF duration PATTERN menu make setting 8-2-11
Keypad Press 5(KF DUR)
USER Use INTERP parameter to make
Interpolation mode PATTERN menu selection. 8-2-10
Keypad Press 8(INTERP)
Preview pattern USER Use PREV item to perform the 8-2-12
PATTERN menu pattern transition
Delete user pattern USER Use the DELETE parameter. 8-2-13
PATTERN menu
Return keypad to normal Press the DVE CH button. The
4 mode On keypad pop-up in the menu screen is
closed. 8-2-14
5 Exit USER PATTERN mode USER Return the SELECT parameter
PATTERN menu to OFF.
6 Modify user pattern DVE MODIFY 9-4
menu

56
8-2-1. Displaying the USER PATTERN Menu
Press the USER(SEQ) button in the menu select section to display the USER PATTERN
menu.

Selecting a user pattern


Turn F1 to select PAT CTRL parameter line in the menu screen. Turn the F2 control, and
then use the SELECT parameter to select the pattern number to be edited. The display in the
information section at the top of the menu changes from NORMAL MODE to USER
PATTERN MODE, and various information is displayed on the menu screen.

IMPORTANT
If the OU is operating in the SEQUENCE mode (See the menu information section.),
turning F2 to select a user pattern at the SELECT parameter in the USER PATTERN
menu will not switch to USER PATTERN MODE. First you will have to exit the
SEQUENCE mode and return to the NORMAL mode (by turning F2 at the first line of
the SEQUENCE menu to select 0.) And then turn F2 in the first line of the USER
PATTERN menu to switch to the USER PATTERN mode. You cannot switch between
USER PATTERN mode and the SEQUENCE mode directly.

User pattern information


If one of the patterns is selected under the SELECT parameter in the USER PATTERN menu,
the OU changes to USER PATTERN MODE, and various information about USER
PATTERN editing is displayed in the information section on the menu.

HVS-1000EOU USER PATTERN MODE JOY STICK CTRL : DVE POS


2004/08/01 POSX : 1200
12:00:00 CUR PAT No:401 CUR CH.:CH1 POSY : 1300
CUR KF 01 REST OF KF No:600 SIZEX/Y : 300
USER PATTERN

PAT CTRL SELECT 1 PROTECT OFF DELETE OFF PREV

KF EDIT CH SEL CH1 KF SEL 1 KF DUR 50 INTERP LINE

DUAL PATT PRIORITY 50

PAT CTRL SELECT PROTECT DELETE PREVIEW


1 OFF OFF
[1/1] SELECT

Display information Description


CUR PAT Displays the currently selected user pattern number.
CUR CH Displays the currently selected channel number.
CUR KF Displays the currently selected keyframe number.
REST OF KF Displays the number of available keyframes.

57
The following operations are available in the USER PATTERN menu. For details about the
respective parameters, refer to the relevant sections.
Parameter
Line Description Refer to
name
SELECT Used to select the user pattern number for editing. 8-2-1
PAT PROTECT Used to set the selected pattern to overwrite protect. 8-2-2
CTRL DELETE Used to delete the selected pattern. 8-2-13
PREV Used to verify the pattern by performing pattern transition 8-2-12
CH SEL Used to select the channel for editing (linked with keypad operation). 8-2-4
KF SEL Used to select the current keyframe (linked with keypad operation). 8-2-6
KF Used to set the interval between the current keyframe and the next
EDIT KF DUR 8-2-11
keyframe.
Used to set the interpolation mode used between the current
INTERP keyframe and next keyframe. 8-2-10
Used to set switching priority point between two channels from 0 to
100 in 100 steps.
DUAL PRIORITY 0: Switches just after the transition started. (default)
PATT
50: Switches in the middle of the transition
100: Switches after the transition has finished.

8-2-2. PROTECT Setting


Before editing user patterns, set the PROTECT parameter in the USER PATTERN menu to
OFF. To prevent changes or overwriting to the user pattern, set the PROTECT parameter to
ON.
Turn the F1 control to align the cursor with the PAT CTRL line.
Turn the F3 control to set PROTECT ON/OFF.

8-2-3. Setting the Keypad to USER PATTERN Editing


Press the DVE CH button on the keypad to light the button. The keypad changes to USER
PATTERN editing, and the window displays a keypad pop-up on the menu screen indicating
the USER PATTERN editing functions.

Keypad for USER PATTERN editing

CH1 INTERP KF KF
7 8 9 STORE SELECT INSERT ADD

CH2 KF OVER
4 5 6 RECALL SELECT WRITE
DUR

KF KF INC
1 2 3 +/- COPY PASTE DEC

KF SHIFT PREV
0 CLEAR SHIFT ENTER DELETE

Keypad pop-up display


The buttons with circled characters cannot
be used when the PROTECT is set to ON.

58
Button Function Description
Used to select DVE channel 1. (It also can be set at the menu CH SEL
7 CH1 SELECT parameter.)
Used to select interpolation mode for the selected KF. Each time the button is
8 INTERP pressed, the setting is changed alternately as follows: CUT-> LINE ->
SMOOTH. Press RECALL (OVERWRITE) to confirm the setting.
9 KF INSERT Used to insert the current DVE operational status as a new keyframe.
STORE KF ADD Used to add the current DVE operational status as a new keyframe.
Used to select DVE channel 2. (It can also be set by the menu CH SEL
4 CH2 SELECT parameter.) (Available only when LINE DVE uses 2 channels or a 2-channel
pattern)
Used to set duration time for the selected KF. Once the button is pressed,
5 KF DUR numeric input is available on the keypad. Input the value and press RECALL
(OVERWRITE). When RECALL is pressed, the setting is confirmed and the
keypad is again returned to the USER PATTERN editing mode.
Used to write the current DVE operational status to a selected keyframe
RECALL KF OVERWRITE (current keyframe).
2 KF COPY Used to copy a keyframe.
3 KF PAST Used to overwrite a keyframe.
+/- Used to select a keyframe.
KF INC/DEC +/-: Forward direction
SHIFT
SHIFT and +/-: Reverse direction
CLEAR KF DELETE Used to delete a keyframe. (Press CLEAR and then press ENTER.)
ENTER PREV Used to preview user patterns.

IMPORTANT
Even when a menu other than the USER PATTERN menu is displayed, pressing the
DVE CH button changes the keypad to USER PATTERN editing.

8-2-4. Selecting the DVE Channel (Menu/Keypad)


The currently selected DVE channel (CUR CH) can be checked at the following parameters.
Section Parameter
Information section in menu CUR CH
USER PATTERN menu CH SEL

The DVE channel to be modified can be selected using the following buttons on the keypad.
Select CH1 Press 7 on the keypad.
Select CH2 Press 4 on the keypad.
Currently selected buttons are lit orange. Channels can also be selected using the menu CH
SEL parameter.

8-2-5. Creating New Keyframes


If no keyframe is saved to a selected user pattern, a new keyframe needs to be created first.
The following procedure is used to create a keyframe.
Assign LINE DVE to the PGM bus (See section 9-1 ”Assigning LINE DVE.”) To use two
channels, assign LINE DVE to the PST bus.
Modify DVE to create the DVE video that you want to register as a keyframe. (See
section 9-3 "LINE DVE Modify Setting Example.”)
Press STORE (KF ADD) on the keypad to create a new keyframe.

59
8-2-6. Selecting Keyframes (Menu/Keypad)
The number of the currently selected keyframe (Current Keyframe) can be checked under
the following parameters.
Section Parameter
Information section of the menu CUR KF
USER PATTERN menu KF SEL

Using the following keypad buttons allows users to move between.


Button Function Description
Pressing +/- once moves the focus to the next
+/- KF INC
keyframe.
Pressing +/- once with holding down the SHIFT
+/- + SHIFT KF DEC
moves the focus to the previous keyframe.
The keyframes can also be selected using the menu KF SEL parameter.

8-2-7. Adding and Overwriting Keyframes (Keypad)


Keyframes can be added in one of two ways, by pressing the 9 button for the INSERT
command or by pressing the STORE button for the ADD command. Also, if keyframes are
added when the KF DUR and INTERP parameters are already set, the current keyframe
duration (KF DUR) and interpolation (INTERP) settings will be applied to the new keyframe.

Before adding keyframes


Total number of keyframes: 5 / Current keyframe: 3
CH1 1 2 3 4 5

Using KF INSERT to add keyframe


The current DVE status is created as a new keyframe and set before the current keyframe.
CH1 1 2 3 4 5 6
KF3 is inserted as a new keyframe so that the total number of keyframes becomes 6, and the
current keyframe becomes KF3.
The keyframes KF3, KF4, and KF5 before adding are moved back to become KF4, KF5, and
KF6, respectively.

Using KF ADD to add keyframe


The current DVE status is created as a new keyframe and set after the current keyframe.
CH1 1 2 3 4 5 6
KF4 is added as a new keyframe so that the total number of keyframes becomes 6, and the
current keyframe becomes KF4.
The keyframes KF4 and KF5 before adding are moved back to become KF5 and KF6.

Overwriting keyframes
Press the RECALL button on the keypad. The current DVE status is overwritten to the
current keyframe.

60
8-2-8. Copying and Pasting Keyframes (Keypad)
Use the +/- and/or SHIFT button on the keypad to select the keyframe to be copied.
Press the keypad 2 button to copy the keyframe information.
Select the target keyframe for copying. Press the keypad 3 button to paste the
information data.
The existing data in the target keyframe is overwritten.

8-2-9. Deleting Keyframes (Keypad)


Use the +/- and/or SHIFT button on the keypad to select the keyframe to be deleted.
Press the keypad CLEAR button.
Press the ENTER button to delete the keyframe. Pressing CLEAR before pressing
ENTER will cancel the operation.

8-2-10. Selecting the Interpolation Mode (Menu)


The interpolation mode can be set for each keyframe respectively in user patterns.
Turn the F1 control to align the cursor with the PAT CTRL line.
Turn the F2 control to select the pattern using the SELECT parameter.
Turn the F1 control to align the cursor with the KF EDIT line.
Turn the F2 control to select the channel, and turn the F3 control to select a keyframe to
be set.
Turn the F5 control to set the interpolation mode using the INTERP parameter. The
interpolation mode setting is applied to the interval between the current keyframe and next
keyframe.

The operation of each interpolation mode is illustrated in the diagram below.


LINE: Linear SMOOTH: Curve
CUT: No Interpolation
Interpolation Interpolation

Press the keypad RECALL(OVERWRITE) button to overwrite the keyframe. The


currently set interpolation is now applied to the keyframe.

Operational Note
When the DVE CH button light is ON, pressing 8 on the keypad can select the
interpolation mode. After the setting, press RECALL(OVERWRITE) to confirm the
setting.

61
8-2-11. Setting the Keyframe Duration
The default setting for keyframe duration is 30 frames. This can be set for each keyframe
respectively.
Select a keyframe using the keypad or in the USER PATTERN menu. (To set the
duration between KF1 and KF2, select KF1.)
Turn the F1 control in the USER PATTERN menu to align the cursor with the KF EDIT
line.
Turn the F4 control, and then change the duration using the KF DUR parameter.
Press the keypad RECALL(OVERWRITE) button to overwrite the keyframe. The
currently set duration is now applied to the keyframe.

Operational Note
When the DVE CH button light is ON, pressing 5 on the keypad can set the keyframe
duration. And then input the duration value using keypad. After the setting, press
RECALL(OVERWRITE) to confirm the setting.

8-2-12. Previewing User Patterns


This procedure previews a user pattern.
Turn F1 to align the cursor to the PAT CTRL line.
Press F5 under the PREV parameter.
Use the fader lever or the AUTO button to preview the user pattern. (Note that the pattern
number applied to the background transition is automatically changed when previewing a
user pattern.)

NOTE
Pressing ENTER(PREV) in the keypad also allows to preview user patterns when the
keypad is set to User Pattern editing mode (The DVE CH button light is ON.) After
pressing ENTER(PREV), Use the fader lever or the AUTO button to perform the user
pattern transition.

8-2-13. Deleting User Patterns


This procedure deletes all setting information in a user pattern.
Turn the F1 control to align the cursor with the PAT CTRL line.
Turn the F2 control to select the pattern using the SELECT parameter.
Turn the F4 control to set the DELETE parameter to ON. Press the F3 control to display
the confirmation pop-up on the menu.
Turn the F4 control to align the cursor with YES, and then press F4 to delete the user
pattern. If the cursor is aligned with NO, pressing F4 will cancel the operation.

62
8-2-14. Exiting User Pattern Editing
Press the DVE CH button to turn off the button light to return to the normal keypad. The
keyframe editing pop-up is closed, and keyframes can no longer be added or deleted.
To exit all user pattern editing, turn F2 to set 0 under SELECT in the first line of the USER
PATTERN menu. This will make the OU to exit the USER PATTERN mode and then to return
to NORMAL mode.

8-3. Executing User Patterns


User patterns can be modified and modified user patterns can be also assigned to buses and
executed in the same way as DVE preset patterns. When the numbers 1 to 50 selected under
the SELECT parameter in the USER PATTERN menu are assigned to a bus as a pattern, they
become numbers 401 to 450. Like other DVE preset patterns, the TRANSITION menu, DVE
MODIFY menu, pattern list, and direct patterns can be used when assigning a pattern.

8-4. Modifying Created Keyframes


The following procedure is used to modify created keyframes.
Select the user pattern. (See section 8-2-1 “Displaying the USER PATTERN Menu.”)
Select the channel. (See section 8-2-4 “Selecting the DVE Channel.”)
Select the keyframe to be modified. (See section 8-2-6 “Selecting Keyframes.”) If connected
to a monitor, the status of the selected keyframe is output to the monitor.
Modify the keyframe using the relevant menu.

Changing KF DUR and INTERP


Use the settings in the USER PATTERN menu to change the parameters. (See sections
8-2-10 and 8-2-11.)

Changing the DVE modify parameter


Open the DVE MODIFY menu to display the status of the selected keyframe. Use the
parameters to make any changes. When connected to a monitor, you can check the changes
viewing the monitor.

Changing the DVE channel priority


If the user pattern has a two-channel configuration, setting the LEVEL parameter in the
PRIORITY line of the DVE MODIFY menu enables changing of the layer position of the DVE
channel. Higher values for the LEVEL parameter correspond to higher layers for the channel.
After the all modified settings are made, press the DVE CH button on the keypad to change
the keypad to USER PATTERN editing, and then press the RECALL(OVERWRITE) button to
overwrite the keyframe. The modify setting currently made is not applied to the keyframes
unless the overwrite is performed. Also, if the keyframe is changed without overwriting, all
modified settings will be lost.

Modify other keyframes in a same way to make the modified user pattern.

63
9. LINE DVE
LINE DVE is a setting that applies DVE effects to an individual bus and uses reduce, enlarge,
rotation, lighting, and other operations to allow modification of the video for that bus. LINE DVE
operations are available for PGM, PST, KEY1 and KEY2 buses. To set the LINE DVE to ON, press
the DVE button in each M/E bus.

9-1. Assigning LINE DVE


The buttons used to LINE DVE operations are marked in the figure below.

HVS-1000
DIGITAL VIDEO SWITCHER

STATUS TRANS WIPE MATT SEQ EVENT DVE CH DIRECT PATT


(SETUP) (PATTERN SEL) (BORDER)

7 8 9 STORE
STILL KEY1 KEY2 DSK
(FILE) (MASK1) (MASK2) (MASK)

4 5 6 RECALL
EDITOR EDGE1
(SHADOW1)
EDGE2
(SHADOW2)
OPT SEL LCD
1 2 3 +/-
USER DVE WARP CROP
(SEQ) (FREEZE) (BORDER) (TRAIL)

X Y Z
CLEAR SHIFT ENTER
0 (CANCEL) (PAUSE) (PLAY)
ON/OFF SUB EFF SHADOW SHIFT
(MOSAIC) (HILITE) DVE POS WIPE POS DEF

ACCESS MEMORY CARD


DVE ROT AUTO CK MENU

USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

BKGD KEY1 KEY2 DSK BLACK


BUS
SELECT
TRANSITION
KEY1 KEY2 DSK EFFECT BK AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 INPUT PREV PGM PREV CLEAN DVE KEY UTILITY IN NOR NOR/REV REV FADER LIM SEQ LINK
RATE

MIX MIX MIX


WIPE WIPE WIPE
DVE DVE DVE
KEY/ KEY1
AUX
BLACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MATT DVE SHIFT FAM OVER
BLACK
TRANS
NAM ON ON

BKGD KEY1 KEY2


CUT
NEXT TRANSITION
BLACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MATT DVE SHIFT
MIX WIPE DVE
(FAM) (NAM) MIX

TRANSITION TYPE

CUT DSK
BLACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MATT DVE SHIFT AUTO
TRANS TRANS

9-1-1. Assigning to PGM bus


Follow the procedure below to assign the LINE DVE to PGM bus and open the DVE MODIFY
menu specific for PGM bus.

Press the DVE button on the PGM bus section. The DVE button and the selected bus
signal button turn red.
Press the DVE CH button above the keypad. The 7(DVE-PGM) button should turn
orange. If the button lights green, press the 7(DVE-PGM) button to lit orange.
Press the DVE(FREEZE) button in the menu select section to open the DVE MODIFY
menu specific for PGM bus. (See section 9-4 “DVE MODIFY Menu.")

64
9-1-2. Assigning to PST bus
Follow the procedure below to assign the LINE DVE to PST bus and open the DVE MODIFY
menu specific for PST bus.

Press the DVE button on the PST bus section. The DVE button and the selected bus
signal button turn red.
Press the DVE CH button above the keypad. 4(DVE-PST) button should turn orange. If
the button lights green, press the 4(DVE-PST) button to lit orange.
Press the DVE(FREEZE) button in the menu select section to open the DVE MODIFY
menu specific for PST bus. (See section 9-4 “DVE MODIFY Menu.")

9-1-3. Assigning to KEY1 or KEY2 bus


Follow the procedure below to assign the LINE DVE to KEY1 (or KEY2) bus and open the
DVE MODIFY menu specific for KEY1 (or KEY2) bus.

Press the KEY1 (or KEY2) button in the BUS SELECT section.
Press the DVE button on the PST bus section. The DVE button and the selected bus
signal button turn red.
Press the DVE CH button above the keypad. 1(DVE-KEY1) (or 0(DVE KEY2)) button
should turn orange. If the button lights green, press the 1(DVE-KEY1) (or 0(DVE KEY2))
button to lit orange.
Press the DVE(FREEZE) button in the menu select section to open the DVE MODIFY
menu specific for KEY1 (or KEY2) bus. (See section 9-4 “DVE MODIFY Menu.")

IMPORTANT
When there are no free DVE channels, the LINE DVE function is not available, and the
buttons will not light even if they are pressed. Cancel a BKGD, KEY1, or KEY2 DVE
transition, or another LINE DVE, and then press the button again. (For details on the
number of DVE channels, see section 9-2 "DVE Options.”)
The bus that is set in the DVE MODIFY menu is determined by the lighting colors of
the 7(DVE-PGM), 4(DVE-PST), 1(DVE KEY1), and 0(DVE KEY2) buttons. Pressing
the DVE(FREEZE) button opens the DVE MODIFY menu of the button that is orange.

65
9-2. DVE Options
The HVS-1000 series switchers have two kinds of DVE options. Installation of option boards
enables the operations shown in the table below.

Number of Channels (Layers) Number of


Configuration Available Effects
HD SD Patterns
Standard 1 2 58 DVE MODIFY
DVE-1000HS
2 4 58 DVE MODIFY
installed
DVE-1000HSA DVE MODIFY with
2 4 120
installed WARP effect

3D DVE Pattern
Page turns and other complicated 3D DVE preset patterns with WARP effects are available with
the DVE-1000HSA option. Note that the two-channel patterns in the number 200 to 219 range
can only be used for BKGD transitions. Only one-channel preset patterns are available for key
transitions (KEY1 and KEY2).

DVE Channel (Layer)


The number of buses available for the DVE is determined by the number of available layers and
number of channels for the patterns that are used. When using a standard DVE (one channel)
pattern, simultaneous DVE transitions are possible for background and KEY1 in SD mode with
the standard configuration. On the other hand, in SD mode with an optional configuration,
simultaneous DVE transition is available using a two-channel pattern for the background or
one-channel pattern for KEY1 and KEY2.

When using the LINE DVE, one channel (layer) must be used for one bus. This can be used
together with DVE transitions. For example, operations can be made using LINE DVE for the
PGM bus and PST bus and executing the DVE transition for KEY1. However, since the number
of overall available channels does not change, make the settings while taking into account the
number of available layers.

IMPORTANT
If all available DVE channels (layers) are used, the settings cannot be made and the
button will not light up when the DVE button on each bus or the DVE button in the
NEXT TRANSITION section is pressed. In this case, cancel another DVE setting, and
then press the button again.

66
9-3. LINE DVE Modify Setting Example
This section shows the Modify procedure for setting the PGM bus to LINE DVE and reducing the
PGM image.
Press the DVE button in the PGM bus section to light up.
Press the DVE (FREEZE) button in the menu select section to open the DVE MODIFY top
menu.
The DVE (FREEZE) button in the menu select section turns orange.
Check that 7(DVE-PGM) in the keypad section is lit orange. If the button is lit green, press the
7(DVE-PGM) button to change it to orange.
Turn F1 to select DVE POS line.
In the DVE POS line, turn F4 under the X-Y parameters to change the size of the PGM image
with the same aspect ratio.
Turn F2 and F3 to change the position of the PGM image.

PGM image PST image

Change size Change position

IMPORTANT
Press the DVE POS button in the joystick section to enable setting of POSITION (X,Y)
for DVE using the joystick without opening the menu. Double-clicking the DVE POS
button accesses the DVE POS line of the menu directly.

67
9-4. DVE MODIFY Menu
In addition to DVE transitions using DVE preset patterns, the HVS-1000HS is also capable of
LINE DVE operation. The DVE transition applies the sequence for a preset DVE effect to a bus,
but LINE DVE enables manual operation of DVE effects for an individual bus.
The DVE MODIFY menu is used to set which effects are applied to the bus when using LINE
DVE. On the other hand, the DVE preset pattern itself can be modified using the DVE MODIFY
menu. This chapter explains the available modify effects for DVE and details about the DVE
MODIFY menu.
For the procedures for modifying LINE DVE, see section 9-3 "LINE DVE Modify Setting
Example." For the procedures for modifying the DVE preset pattern, see 7-7-3 "DVE Pattern
Modify Setting Example. See the table below for the available DVE effects and parameters in
the DVE MODIFY menu.
Accessed
Button Effect Line Parameter Reference/Note
STORE, BACK
Save and activate DVE STILL. DVE STILL 9-4-2
IMAGE
Changes position in XY plane. DVE POS X, Y
Changes horizontal and vertical
sizes SIZE X, Y
Changes horizontal and vertical DVE POS XY
sizes together 9-4-1
DVE Sets position in local XYZ plane. LOCAL POS X, Y, Z
Sets rotation in local XYZ plane. LOCAL ROT X, Y, Z
Sets position in global XYZ plane. GLOBAL POS X, Y, Z
Sets rotation in global XYZ plane. GLOBAL ROT X, Y, Z
Sets fade in / out level of image FADE/PERSP FADE LV
Changes reference viewpoint for FADE/PERSP PERSP 9-4-3
image
CROP ENABLE, ALL
CROP Crops DVE image. TOP, BOTTOM, 9-4-4
CROP POS LEFT, RIGHT
WARP1 TYPE, LEVEL 9-4-5
WARP Some type effects
Sets Warp effects. cannot be used
(option) WARP2 DIR, RAD, ROLL, etc with HILITE or
MOSAIC
ENABLE, WID (X, Y,
BORDER-IN 9-4-6
X/Y)
BRDR COLOR SAT, LUM, HUE, Applicable to
BORDER Sets border effect. keyers (DVE
BDR (X, Y, X/Y) ver.2.05)
SOFT EDGE EDGE SOFT Not applicable to
BORDER-OUT ENABLE, WID (X, Y, keyers. (DVE ver.1)
(DVE Ver.2.05) X/Y)
TRAIL Sets trail effect. TRAIL TYPE, LENGTH
9-4-7
SHADOW Sets shadow effect. SHADOW SOFT, X, Y, LEVEL
SELECT,
Sets defocus effect. DEFOCUS LEVEL (H, V, H/V)
SUB EFF 9-4-8
MONO-COLO
Sets monochrome color. R SAT, HUE, SELECT
9-4-8
Sets mosaic effect. MOSAIC MOSAIC Unable to use with
MOSAIC MULTI warp type.
Sets resolution for luminance / PAINT Y-LV, C-LV, Y/C-LV 9-4-8
chrominance
POS, WIDTH, TYPE, 9-4-9
HILITE BAR ROT, SPOT RAD
HILITE Sets hilite position and color. Unable to use with
HIL COLOR SAT, LUM, HUE some warp types.
Sets the DVE image frozen. FREEZE
FREEZE Sets kind of strobe rate applied FREEZE STRB 9-4-8
Sets polarization effect. NEGA
DVE MODFY menu has multiple pages. Pressing the DVE related menu buttons in the menu select section allows
the user to access the corresponding parameter line directly. The shaded cell items in the table are available in DVE
ver.2 or later.

68
9-4-1. Position and Size
About POSITION:
POSITION simply moves the picture to a different location in the effects space without
changing size or effect spatial references. The examples below represent image positioning
results when GLOBAL POSITION and LOCAL POSITION parameters are both set to default
(0, 0, 0).

(0,0) (200,200) (-200,-200)

About SIZE:
SIZE increases and decreases image area without changing the plane it is positioned on in
the 3D effects space (Do not confuse this setting with Z axis image translation. In that case,
image moves on Z-axis. Image will appear large when closer, smaller when moved back, but
actual image area never changes.) The examples below represent image size results when
POSITION parameters are set to default (0, 0).

(500,500) (500, 750) (750, 750)

About GLOBAL POSITION:


GLOBAL POSITION changes the spatial reference between the local axes positioning and
the 3D effect space axes. Do not confuse global positioning with position / local position
settings. Results look the same on a monitor, but results during effects performance are
different. The examples below represent image movement response when POSITION
parameters are set to -200, 0 and GLOBAL POSITION is to 0, 0, and 0.

POSITION (-200,0)
GLOBAL (0,0,0)

Move along X axis Move along Y axis Move along Z axis

69
About ROTATION:
GLOBAL ROTATION defines the relationship between the image and the 3D effects space
axial coordinates during image rotation in the space. It rotates the image around the center of
the POSITION.

LOCAL ROTATION defines the relationship between the image and its axial coordinates
during image rotation operations and is unrelated to global movement within the 3D effects
space. It rotates the image around the center of the GLOBAL POSITION. The examples
below represent image rotation results when POSITION parameters set to 0,0 and GLOBAL
POSITION to -200, 0.

POSITION (0,0)
GLOBAL (-200,0,0)

Operational Notes
You can increase the step interval when setting the LOCAL and GLOBAL ROTATION
parameters. Three types (360, 1000 and 4000) are available. This is set in the ROT
STEP item in the SETUP - DVE SETUP menu.

GLOBAL ROTATION example

X axis rotation Y axis rotation Z axis rotation

LOCAL ROTATION example

X axis rotation Y axis rotation Z axis rotation

About LOCAL POSITION:


LOCAL POSITION changes the spatial positioning reference between image location and
the global position space reference. Note that the POSITION setting made on page 1 of the
menu is a planar (X/Y) change along the local position axes. LOCAL POSITION is a
positioning change of the image within the 3D effects space.

70
9-4-2. DVE STILL (DVE. Ver.2.00 or later)
The DVE STILL is used to save an image for DVE-specific still. This image can be applied to
back side of the DVE image such as the reverse page of page turn effects or the side walls of
PIZZA BOX.
Saving DVE STILL
Make an image that you want to use for DVE STILL to output the program line.
Press the DVE button to display the DVE MODIFY menu. Press F4 on the DVE STILL
line. A “beep” sound will be heard and the program image is saved to the DVE STILL.

Applying DVE STILL


In the DVE MODIFY menu, turn F5 to set BACK IMG item to ON.

IMPORTANT
PIZZA SIDE image and DVE STILL use a same buffer. So when using a PIZZA BOX
effect, DVE STILL cannot be used regardless of the BACK IMG setting.

9-4-3. PERSPECTIVE
This parameter changes the view angle reference for the image and does not change image
size.

9-4-4. CROP
PRESET PATTERN CROP (applied to all DVE patterns)
Preset crop setting can be made for all DVE preset patterns. This setting is made in the
SETUP - DVE SETUP menu. In addition to being able to crop uniformly on the top, bottom,
left and right. (See section 7-3-4 “DVE Transition" for more details.)

DVE MODIFY CROP (applied to each DVE pattern)


Crop setting also can be made for each DVE pattern in DVE MODIFY menu. The background
image will be applied to the cropped area.

TOP and BOTTOM crop LEFT and RIGHT crop

71
9-4-5. WARP (Option)
Parameter Range Description
See "About TYPE" Selects the type of DVE effect applied to
* TYPE
table following. the pattern.
LEVEL OFF, -7999-7999 See "About TYPE" table following.
WARP
DIR OFF, -7999-7999 See "About TYPE" table following.
RAD 0-7999 See "About TYPE" table following.
ROLL OFF, -7999-7999 See "About TYPE" table following.
* Note that the available setting parameters and setting ranges vary depending on the WARP type. Only the
required parameters are displayed in the menu when the WARP type is selected. A WARP type such as
SPHERE, MULTI and PIZZA each uses its own parameters. See TYPE table following for notes which
types are not possible for certain settings.

About TYPE:
TYPE sets the type of warp effect used to modify your DVE pattern. The following table
shows available types and which settings in the above menu apply or do not apply to the
related type as well as how they are applied. (X mark equals setting is invalid.)
TYPE LEVEL DIR RAD ROLL
* PGTURN 0 ~ 2999 -7999 ~ 7999 X
* HZTURN 0 ~ 2999 250 ~ 750 X
0 ~ 7999
* VZTURN 0 ~ 2999 0 ~ 500 X
(DVE Ver.2)
* QDTURN 0 ~ 2999 -125 ~ 125 X
* PGROLL 0 ~ 1500 -7999 ~ 7999 X
900 ~ 1220
* HZROLL 0 ~ 1500 250 ~ 750 X
(DVE Ver.1)
* VZROLL 0 ~ 1500 0 ~ 500 X
* QDROLL 0 ~ 1500 -125 ~ 125 X
WAVE -1000 ~ 1130 -7999 ~ 7999 0 ~ 1900 -7999 ~ 7999
ACCORD -1000 ~ 1130 -7999 ~ 7999 0 ~ 1900 -7999 ~ 7999
SPLIT -1000 ~ 1130 -7999 ~ 7999 0 ~ 1900 -7999 ~ 7999
XSPLIT -1000 ~ 1130 -7999 ~ 7999 0 ~ 1900 -7999 ~ 7999
BURST 0 ~ 1000 -7999 ~ 7999 X -7999 ~ 7999
STREAM 0 ~ 1000 -7999 ~ 7999 X X
* SW WIN -1000 ~ 7999 -7999 ~ 7999 X X
RIPPLE 0 ~ 1000 X X X
LENS -1000 ~ 1000 X X X
TYPE LEVEL QUAD X, Y
* SPHERE 0 ~ 1000 -7999 ~ 7999
SCREW1-4 -1000 ~ 1000 X
STRM1-12 0 ~ 1000 X
TYPE LEVEL GAP SIZE
MULTI 1 ~ 45 -8000 ~ 1000
RAD PIZZA SIDE1 PIZZA SIDE2 SIDE BD
TYPE LEVEL (DVE Ver.2.00) X, Y X, Y (DVE Ver.2.05)
* PIZZA
(PIZZA BOX) 1 ~ 1000 1 ~ 1000 -1000 ~ 1000 -1000 ~ 1000 OFF, ON
TYPE LEVEL SIDE1 X, Y SIDE2 X, Y SIDE1, SIDE2
settings available
* BEVEL only when BACK
0 ~ 1000 -1000 ~ 1000 -1000 ~ 1000
(DVE Ver.2.05) IMAGE is set to ON
W DROP 0~4
(DVE Ver.2.05)

IMPORTANT
1) For some types of the WARP effect, the use of HILITE is impossible and for other
types it is limited. See section 9-4-9 “HILITE" for details.
2) MULTI type warp cannot be used with MOSAIC effect at the same time. (MULTI is
given priority.)

72
3) Refer to sections 10-3-2 and 10-3-3 for more details about SPHERE, MULTI,
PIZZA operations.

9-4-6. BORDER
The figures below show examples of the DVE image with and without border effect applied. If
applied, inner border and outer edge softness can be adjusted up to 15 different levels.

Line Parameter Description


WID-X, WID-Y, WID-XY Sets inside border width.
BORDER-IN
ENABLE Sets inside border effect On or OFF.
BORDER-OUT WID-X, WID-Y, WID-XY Sets outside border width.
(DVE Ver2.05) ENABLE Sets outside border effect On or OFF.
Sets border inside softness. Set to OFF
BDR-X, BDR-Y, BDR-XY
or to 1 of 15 levels.
SOFT EDGE
Sets border outside softness. Set to OFF
EDGE
or to 1 of 15 levels.
BORDER COLOR SAT, LUM, HUE Sets border color.

BORDER-IN Y X SOFT-Y SOFT-X EDGE SOFT

DVE image DVE image DVE image DVE image

W/o border W/ border W/ border and inside W/ border and


softness outside softness

OUTSIDE Y X SOFT-Y SOFT-X EDGE SOFT

DVE image DVE image DVE image DVE image

W/o border W/ border W/ border and inside W/ border and


softness outside softness
EDGE SOFT

EDGE
SOFT
DVE image DVE image

W/o border W/ softness


at the outside edge

IMPORTANT
Note that if you set a DVE pattern at any key, DVE border cannot be applied if DVE
ver.1 is used, however, can be applied if DVE ver.2 is used.

73
9-4-7. TRAIL / SHADOW

Parameter Line Parameter Description


Sets trail effect OFF or to one of four
TYPE types, Decay, Border Decay, Star and
TRAIL Border Star.
LENGTH Sets trail length if TRAIL ON.
POS-X
Sets shadow position.
POS-Y
SHADOW SELECT Sets shadow effect OFF.
LEVEL Sets shadow density level.
SHD-SOFT Sets shadow softness.

TRAIL TYPE:
Both trails fade out according to LENGTH setting made by LENGTH. DECAY and B-DECAY
trails (DVE. Ver.2.00 or later required) look like after images of the effects channels, STAR
and B-STAR trails (DVE. Ver.2.00 or later required) look like a stream of particles behind the
effects image. B-DECAY and B-STAR trails use a border color for fading images.

9-4-8. SUB EFFECT


Following additional sub effects can be available. Note that these sub effects cannot be
always used with other modify settings.

Parameter Line Parameter Description


FREEZE Operation selection
FREEZE STROBE RATE
NEGA Sets negative look effect ON/OFF.
SELECT Operation Selection
H-LV
DEFOCUS
V-LV Sets defocus level
H/V-L
MOSAIC Sets mosaic effect ON/OFF.
Y-LV
PAINT Sets paint effect OFF or Y/C levels
C-LV concurrently or independently.
Y/C-LV
SAT Sets monochrome color if ENABLE set to
MONO COLOR HUE ON.
SELECT Sets monochrome color effect ON/OFF.

DEFOCUS: Gives the image an out-of-focus look. Defocus level can be set.
MOSAIC: Creates a mosaic effect. Mosaic cell size can be changed using the level
setting.
FREEZE: Freezes the image. Frame freeze and field freeze are available.
STROBE RATE: Makes the image look like it was filmed with a strobe light on. The strobe
rate can be varied.
NEGA: Produces a negative look of the image by reversing the luminance level.
PAINT: Gives the image an oil painting look. Chrominance and luminance
resolution level can be set independently or simultaneously.

74
9-4-9. HILITE
Hilite adds a light source effect to the DVE image plane during DVE pattern performance.
Note that this effect cannot be applied to all of the DVE wipe patterns supported by the
switchers. The tables below shows which parameters can be set for hilite effect and which
patterns the hilite can be applied to.

Line Parameter Description


POS See the table below.
WIDTH See the table below.
Sets rotation of the hilite bar.
BAR ROT TYPE = BAR
(DVE Ver.2.00 or later required)
HILITE
Sets angle of the spotlight corn.
SPOT RAD TYPE = SPOT
(DVE Ver.2.00 or later required)
Sets hilite effect OFF or to FLAT or BAR or SPOT effect
TYPE
or AUTO.
SAT
HLT COLOR LUM Sets color of hilite effect.
HUE

HILITE TYPE:
FLAT: Whole image lighted
BAR: Light bar across image (DVE Ver.2.00 or later required)
SPOT: Lighted spot on image (DVE Ver.2.00 or later required)
AUTO: Automated lighting effect applied to some specific WARP patterns (AUTO cannot
be set, but it is automatically selected when adding a hilite to certain WARP
patterns.)

Hilite adds a light source effect to the DVE image plane during DVE wipe pattern
performance. Note that this effect cannot be applied to all of the DVE wipe patterns
supported by the switchers. The table below indicates which patterns it can be applied to and
what parameters are available for it.

WARP HILITE BAR SPOT


WIDTH POS POS-X POS-Y
TYPE TYPE ROT RAD
WAVE ACCORD
RIPPLE -100.0 ~
AUTO 0 ~ 100.0 100.0 - - - -
Page roll and page
turn types
-100.0 ~
OFF FLAT 0 ~ 100.0 - - - -
100.0
PIZZA -100.0 ~ -100.0 ~
FLAT - -
BEVEL 100.0 100.0
-100.0 ~ -7999 ~
OFF BAR 0 ~ 100.0 - - -
100.0 7999
OFF -100.0 ~ -100.0 ~
SPHERE SPOT - - 100.0 100.0 - 0~1000
W DROP FLAT - - - - - -
(WATER DROP)

For PIZZA warp type, hilite applicable only for HD in DVE ver.1 and both for HD/SD in DVE ver.2.
Spot and Bar rot hilite types available in DVE ver.2.
Bevel and W drop warp types available in DVE ver.2

75
10. Examples of Effect Operations
Besides the WIPE and DVE preset patterns, the HVS-1000HS also provides menus and tools that
add a wide variety of effects to video. This section shows examples of some typical effects using
these tools.

10-1. Effects using WIPE Modify


10-1-1. Jagged Edge
This example shows how to add a jagged edge to WIPE pattern 22.
Press the WIPE button in the transition section to light it up.
WIPE PATTERN list should be displayed on the menu screen. Turn F5 to select pattern
22. You can scroll the screen and go to another menu page by turning F5 while holding
down the F5.
Press the WIPE(BORDER) button in the menu select section to display the WIPE
MODIFY menu.
Turn F1 to select EDGE TYPE line. In the EDGE TYPE line, press F2 to select SAW for
TYPE.
Turn F1 to select EDGE MODE line. In the EDGE MODE line, press F3 to set AMP of the
EDGE to 5. And then press F4 to set the FREQ to 5.

IMPORTANT
Be careful when making the AMP and FREQ settings. Flickering can occur in the
effect if these settings are not made properly.

76
10-2. Effects Using Still Store
10-2-1. Motion Blur
Motion blur is an effect that leaves afterimages on a moving object. When the MOTION
BLUR setting in the STILL menu is used, you can easily activate this effect without saving a
motion blur image by simply selecting STILL in the PST bus where the MOTION BLUR
setting was applied and setting to MIX transition. In this example, motion blur will be applied
to STILL4.
Press the STILL(FILE) button with the SHIFT button unlit in the menu select section to
display the STILL menu.
Turn F1 to select SIGNAL line. In the SIGNAL line, turn F2 to select PGM for SIGNAL.
Turn F1 to select MOTION BLUR line. In the MOTION BLUR line, turn F2 to select
STILL4 for SELECT.
Select the bus button of the video input that you want to use for the motion blurs effect in
the PGM bus.
Assign STILL4 to one of the bus buttons (for details about assigning bus buttons, see
section 5-3-3 “Bus Signal Assignment and Inhibit Settings.”) Select the bus button
assigned to STILL4 in the PST bus.
Press the BKGD button in the NEXT TRANSITION section to light up and press the MIX
button in the TRANSITION TYPE section. Use the fader lever or press the AUTO button
to execute the MIX transition.

When the above settings are made, the image displayed on the PGM output screen will
continue to be saved as the STILL4 image. Since this STILL4 image is assigned to the PST
bus, the residual image effect is continued by repeatedly displaying on the PGM output
screen.

IMPORTANT
The motion blur effect can be used on any of STILL1 to STILL4, but it can only be used
on one image at a time. Note that when the MOTION BLUR setting is made for a
STILL, previous image saved for that STILL is lost.

77
10-2-2. Animation Logo
Easy animation effects can be created using STILL STORE images. In this example, an
animation will be created of a moving ping-pong ball and assigned to DSK.

Preparing the Animation Source Images


Prepare 12 (maximum: 36) animation source image files in JPEG or TARGA format and
following pixel size. (Refer to the column “Sending animation files” in the next page for more
details about available file formats.”) To make these images available as keys, set the
background to black. In this example sequential files (ball01.jpg to ball12.jpg) are prepared
and saved to the CF card. Refer to the column “Sending animation files” in the next page to
send the source files to STILL1. A combined single file will be automatically saved to STILL1.
For example, you can check the saved image source, by assigning STILL1 to a bus and turn
it into on-air. The animation source image shown below can be seen, if FRAME is selected
under TYPE in STILL1.
1920 pixels (320 x 6)

ball01.jpg
|
ball12.jpg
Animation Image

1080 pixels
(180 x 6)

STILL Menu Settings


Press the STILL(FILE) button (with the SHIFT button unlit) to display the STILL menu.
Turn F1 to set the STILL TYPE of the STILL1 to ANIME.
Turn F1 to select STILL1 under SELECT item for the ANIMATION. Set 12 (number of
source images) under FRAME item.

IMPORTANT
The animation function may use any one of STILL1 to STILL4, so up to four animation
logos can be prepared. Note that if the power is set to OFF or a REBOOT is
performed, STILL images will be lost. In this case, insert the CF card into the slot and
load the file to a STILL again.

Making the animation logo using the DSK.


Press the DSK(MASK) button in the menu select section to display the DSK menu.
Set the TYPE of DSK to LUM.
Use the DSK menu or KEY bus selection button to select the STILL1 for the DSK signal.
Press the DSK TRANS button in the DSK transition section to make DSK to ON. The
STILL1 image will be displayed as an animation. The following parameters can be set
under the ANIMATION option of STILL menu.

78
Item Description
Number of frames used. Normally, set the number of available
FRAME
original images (maximum: 36)
Output time of one image. A higher value results in slower
SPEED
switching of animation images. Frame based. Maximum: 32
POS-X/Y Sets where the animation logo is appeared in the monitor display.

IMPORTANT
If the animation cannot be displayed clearly, adjust the CLIP and GAIN parameters in
DSK.

Sending animation files


The animation source image files in JPEG or TARGA format saved in the CF card can be sent to
the STILL memories. Prepare 12 (maximum: 36) animation source image files named by
sequential numbers in JPEG or TARGA format and following pixel size.
1080: 320 x 180 (pixel)
720: 212 x 120 (pixel)
NTSC: 120 x 80 (pixel)
PAL: 120 x 94 (pixel)

File format and file name


Jpeg(except JPEG2000 format)and Targa (without alpha channel) files with sequential names
of up to 8 characters are available.
Example: XXXXXX01.JPG to XXXXXX36.JPG
(Any alphanumeric characters can be used for “XXXXXX”.)

Available pixel sizes vary by the operating Video Signal Format. (See the table below.) The
source files should be sent using the FILE menu and arranged as shown in the table below.
Sequential Array of the Source Files Video Signal Available pixel size of the
01 02 03 04 05 06 Format source file (W x H)
07 08 09 10 11 12 1080 320 x 180
13 14 15 16 17 18 720 212 x 120
19 20 21 22 23 24 NTSC 120 x 80
25 26 27 28 29 30 PAL 120 x 94
31 32 33 34 35 36

Sending the source files


Refer to above to prepare the suitable source files and save the files to the CF card using the
your PC, and then insert the card into the OU card slot.
Press the STILL(FILE) button (with the SHIFT lit) to open the FILE menu.
Turn F1 to select SEND, and then press F1 or the DOWN button to open the sub menu.
Turn F1 to align the cursor with the SEND line. Turn F2 to select JP* or TG* for the TYPE.
Turn F3 to select any one of the sequential source files under the SELECT item.
Turn F4 to select from STL1 L to STL4 L. For example, if you want to save the file to STILL1,
select STL1 L.
Press F4. A “beep” sound will be heard and the source data starts to be sent. When the data
transmission has completed, a combined single file made form the source data is
automatically saved to the STILL memory.

79
10-3. Effects Using DVE
10-3-1. WIPE Switchover In A Video Wall (LINE DVE)
The forced background function can be used to perform a WIPE transition in a Video Wall.
Press the DVE button in the PGM bus to set LINE DVE for the PGM to ON.
Press the DVE CH button above keypad to light on. The 7(DVE-PGM) button in the
keypad section should light on orange. If the 7(DVE-PGM) is lit green, press the
7(DVE-PGM) to change it to orange.
Press the DVE(FREEZE) button to open the DVE MODIFY top menu specific for PGM
bus.
Double-click the DVE POS button next to the joystick. The DVE POS line of the DVE
MODIFY menu should be selected automatically. Turn F4 clockwise under SIZE-XY to
reduce the PGM image.
Move the joystick in any of the four directions (up, down, right, or left) to place the PGM
image to the desired position.

PGM image PST image

Change size Change position

Press the DVE button for the PST bus while holding down the DVE button for the PGM
bus. The background changes to the DVE BKGD image. (The DVE background image
can be changed in the TRANSITION menu.)
Select the WIPE type for the BKGD transition, and then turn F5 to select the WIPE
pattern (No. 000 in the example below) on the menu screen. Either move the fader lever,
or press the AUTO button to execute the transition. The WIPE transition is executed in the
Video Wall. (This is also possible with a MIX transition.)

DVE BKGD image

Video Wall Video Wall Video Wall


(PGM image) (WIPE transition) (PST image)

IMPORTANT
When using DVE effects, the DVE background signal will be displayed if the screen
cannot be filled using only the PGM bus and PST bus signals. The DVE background
signal can be selected in the TRANSITION menu. MATT and EFF BG are available. If
EFF BG is set, select the signal in the BUS SELECT and AUX/BUS sections.

80
10-3-2. DVE MULTI MOVE (DVE Pattern Modify)
This setting example shows the adding of multi-effects to a DVE image. This effect can be
applied to either DVE pattern or LINE DVE. The DVE-1000HSA option board is required for
DVE MULTI MOVE.
Press the DVE(FREEZE) button to open the DVE MODIFY top menu.
Press the DVE button on the bus where you want to set the LINE DVE to ON. If you want
to use the PGM bus, press the DVE button on the PGM bus to ON.
Press the DVE CH button above keypad to light on. The 7(DVE-PGM) button in the
keypad section should light on orange (if the PGM is set). If the 7(DVE-PGM) is lit green,
press the 7(DVE-PGM) to change it to orange.
Turn F1 to select DVE POS line.
Change the POSITION, SIZE, and other parameters,
and then place the DVE image in the center of the screen.
Turn F1 to select FADE/PERSP line.
Change PERSP to create the DVE image as shown at right.
Press the WARP(BORDER) button. In the WARP line, select MULTI under TYPE.
Set the LEVEL to 3. Nine (3 x 3) multi-video will be displayed in the DVE image.

Border
Width is determined by GAP SIZE.

By increasing the GAP SIZE in the WARP2 line gradually widens the gap between videos,
and the open space appears black. Lowering the value closes the gap between the
images, and they will gradually overlap. Set the gap for split screens.

IMPORTANT
If borders are used, they are added to the outer frame of the DVE image, instead of the
frames of each individual multi-video. This setting cannot be used together with
MOSAIC.

81
10-3-3. PIZZA BOX (DVE Pattern Modify)
This example shows how to create a pizza box for a live image with a side logo. This effect
can be applied to either DVE pattern or LINE DVE. The DVE-1000HSA option board is
required for PIZZA BOX.

Setting the side logo


Set the logo to be positioned on the pizza box side.
Use a logo generator or other tool to prepare an image
similar to that shown on the right.
In this example, the logo signal is input to INPUT2.
Press the DVE button and turn F5 to select the DVE
pattern on the menu screen.
Press the WARP(BORDER) button on the menu select section to go to the WARP1 line.
In the WARP1 line, select PIZZA for TYPE.
Press the STILL(FILE) button with the SHIFT button unlit to display the STILL menu.
Select the IN02 input signal at the PGM bus.
Press F3 in the SIGNAL line. The logo image used for the side is saved.
The DVE STILL image can be captured using the DVE STILL STORE in the DVE
MODIFY menu.

IMPORTANT
Only one still image for PIZZA BOX can be stored. This remains the case even when
two DVE boards are installed. The still image is lost when the MU is turned off. Also,
be aware that the image may be shaken or distorted when STILL STORE is used.
DVE STILL STORE cannot be save during DVE-FREEZE operation.

Creating PIZZA BOX


Press the WARP(BORDER) button with the SHIFT button unlit to open the DVE
MODIFY menu.
Select the bus where you want to apply the DVE effect. If applied to the PGM bus, press
the DVE button to light up.
Press the DVE CH button above keypad to light on. The 7(DVE-PGM) button in the
keypad section should light on orange (if the PGM is set). If the 7(DVE-PGM) is lit green,
press the 7(DVE-PGM) to change it to orange.
Turn F1 to select WARP1 line. In the WARP1 line, check that the TYPE is set to PIZZA.
When LEVEL is raised while a rotation is applied to the DVE image (live video), the side
for PIZZA BOX becomes visible.
Turn F1 to select WARP2 line.
Set the reference point for side 1 at PIZZA SIDE1 (X, Y) to (0, 0).
Set the reference point for side 2 at PIZZA SIDE2 (X, Y) to (0, -750).

82
Pizza box sides setting image

(0,1000)
PIZZA SIDE1 (X,Y)

(-1000,0)
(0,0) (1000,0)

PIZZA SIDE2 (X,Y) LEVEL


(thickness of
the box)
(0,-1000)

*The area outside the still image


will be black.
MATT Area

Pizza box appearance

PIZZA SIDE2 (X,Y)

Live Video

Side 1
Side 2
PST/BKGD

PIZZA SIDE1 (X,Y)

Turn the control F3 to increase the value for RAD, if you want to round the Pizza box
corners..

NOTE
By changing the size, moving the position, and for rotation in the next keyframe , you
can make effects such as the pizza box turns and becomes smaller until it disappears.
When adding a border, set both BORDER-IN ENABLE and SIDE BORDER to ON. it
will be added to the frame of the SIDE1 and SIDE2 images. If set the SIDE BORDER
to OFF, a border will be added to the frame of the live image. Borders cannot be
applied to the pizza box as a whole and Soft edges cannot be used.
As for the HILITE effects, the FLAT type is only available for the Pizza box.

83
11. Key Operations
Keys are additional signal layers you can composite over the M/E background signal. Standard
keys are basically created by inserting part of one picture into another to create a composite signal
result as the figure below.

Background

Background + Key Cut

Key Cut

Background + Key

Key Insert (fill) Key Insert to ‘Hole’

HVS-1000 series switchers offer an internal downstream keyer (DSK) and also optional two keyers
(KEY1 and KEY2) with chromakey functions. Each key feature is shown in the table below.
KEY KEY1 KEY2 DSK
Standard / Option Option Option Standard
Luminance key
Available Available Available
(Self key)
Type
Bus key Available Available Available
Chroma key (*1) Available Available Not Available
Invert Available Available Available
BOX mask Available Available Available
Effect KEY mask Available Available Not Available
Edge Available Available Not Available
Shadow Available Available Not Available
Priority Change Available Available Not Available
CUT Available Available Available
MIX Available Available Available
Transition
WIPE (*2) Available Available Not Available
DVE Available Available Not Available
(*1) Refer to section12 “Chromakeys" for more details.
(*2) WIPE transitions can be used simultaneously with background and KEY1 or background and KEY2, but the
same pattern applied to both. See section 7-3-3 “WIPE Transition."

84
11-1. Luminance Key Setup
The Luminance key is also called a self key, and it uses the same image in the key source and
key insert. This image is selected by key insert. The signal that creates a key can be selected
from the buttons in the AUX/KEY bus section. It can also be selected from the menu screen.
KEY1, KEY2, and DSK can all be created in the same way.
This example uses DSK to create the Luminance key.

Setting Key Type to Luminance


In the menu select section, press DSK(MASK) button to ON (lit) to display the DSK setup
menu.
Turn F1 to select KEY SOURCE1 line. In the KEY SOURCE1 line, turn F2 to select LUM for
TYPE.

In the BUS SELECT section, press the DSK button to ON. (Lit orange).
In the KEY/AUX bus section, press a bus button to select a key insert signal.

NOTE
You can also select the key insert signal in the INPUT parameter block in the KEY
INSERT line of the DSK menu.

In the DSK transition section, press the CUT or MIX button to ON (lit) to select the transition
type.
Press the DSK TRANS button in the DSK transition section to perfrom the key transition.

85
11-2. Bus Key Setup
The bus key uses separate signals for the key insert and key source. To create a bus key, select
the key insert/key source signals in each keyer menu. However, since the operation for selecting
the signal from the menu takes some time, in the HVS-1000EOU, the settings are first made at
the menu, and then the key link function is set to ON so that keys can be created by selecting
only key fill (insert) signals.
When the key link function is set to ON, the key source signal making a pair is automatically
chosen once the key insert signal is selected. To change the paired source signal, first set the
key insert signal, then change a key source for that insert signal in each keyer menu. The key
link ON/OFF setting can be made in the SETUP - MU MODE menu. (Factory default setting is
ON). This section shows an example of using the key link to create a DSK bus key.

Creating key links


The following procedure shows how to make the key pairs shown in the table below using the
DSK menu.

Key pair 1 Key pair 2


Signal name Bus button Signal name Bus button
Key source IN01 1 IN03 3
Key insert IN02 2 MATT1 4
Input signals above are assumed to be already assigned to the bus buttons. For details on
assigning signals to the bus buttons, see section 5-3-3 “Bus Signal Assignment and Inhibit
Settings.”

In the menu select section, press DSK(MASK) button to ON (lit) to display the DSK menu.
Turn F1 to select KEY SOURCE1 line.
In the KEY SOURCE1 line turn F2 to select BUS for TYPE.
Turn F1 to select KEY INSERT line. In the KEY INSERT line turn F2 to select BUS for TYPE.
Then turn F3 to select IN01 for INPUT. Turn F1 to go back to the KEY SOURCE1 line, in the
KEY SOURCE1 line, turn F3 to select IN02 for INPUT.
In the same way as above, in the KEY INSERT line, select IN03 for the INPUT and in the KEY
SOURCE1 line, select MATT1 for INPUT.

IMPORTANT
Once key pairs are set in the KEY1, KEY2, or DSK menu, other keyers can still use the
same key pair. The key pair settings can be made regardless of ON/OFF of the key
link function.

Setting KEY LINK to ON


The key link function is set to ON at the factory default, however, if it set to OFF, follow the
procedure below to set the function to ON.
In the menu select section, press the SHIFT button to ON (lit). Then press the
STATUS(SETUP) button to display the SETUP top menu.
Turn the F1 control to select MU MODE, and then press F1 or the DOWN button to open the
SETUP-MU MODE menu.
In the SETUP-MU MODE menu, turn F1 to select KEYER line. In the KEYER line, turn F2 to
set the LINK item to ON. Press ENTER on the keypad to confirm the setting.

86
Performing a transition
Press DSK in the BUS SELECT section to light up the button. Press the bus button 2 for the
KEY/AUX bus to light it up. This selects the preset key pair 1. To select key pair 2, press bus
button 4 to light it up.

BUS
SELECT
KEY1 KEY2 DSK EFFECT BK AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 INPUT PREV PGM PREV CLEAN DVE KEY UTILITY IN

KEY/
AUX
BLACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MATT DVE SHIFT

Press MIX or CUT button in the DSK transition section to select the transition type.
Press the DSK TRANS button in the DSK transition section to perform the key transition.

BKGD KEY1 KEY2 DSK BLACK

TRANSITION
NOR NOR/REV REV FADER LIM SEQ LINK
RATE

MIX MIX MIX


WIPE WIPE WIPE
DVE DVE DVE
KEY1
FAM BLACK
OVER TRANS
NAM ON ON

BKGD KEY1 KEY2


CUT
NEXT TRANSITION

MIX WIPE DVE


(FAM) (NAM) MIX

TRANSITION TYPE

CUT DSK
AUTO
TRANS TRANS

REFERENCE
Refer to sections 7-2 "DSK Transitions” and 7-3 ”BKGD, KEY1, and KEY2 Transitions"
for key transitions and section 11-4 "Key Adjustments.”

87
11-3. Available Signals
The key signals are not limited only to those assigned to the bus buttons. All of the signals below
can be used by selecting them from the menu.

IMPORTANT
The key insert signal must first be assigned to a bus button in order to use the key link
function and allow selections with the bus buttons.

Signal Description
BLAK Internally generated Black signal
IN01-IN16 Primary input 01 to 16
UTL-IN Signal from rear UTL-IN
STL1-STL4 Still 1 to Still 4
MATT1-MATT2 Color matt 1 and 2
WHITE Internally generated White signal
COLBAR Internally generated color bar signal

11-3-1. KEY MATT


In addition to the MATT1 and MATT2 bus matt signals, key-only MATT signals can also be
used. The KEY MATT color setting can be made in each keyer menu using the procedure
below.

In each keyer (DSK, KEY1 or KEY2) menu, turn F1 to select the KEY INSERT line. In the
KEY INSERT line, turn F2 to select MATT for TYPE.
Turn F1 to select the INSERT MATT line.
Set the LUM, SAT, and HUE parameter under the COLOR to make a desired color for the
key matt. You can also set the color using the color palette. See section 5-2 “MATT" for
how to use the color palette.

IMPORTANT
The key link function is not available when using KEY MATT.

88
11-4. Key Adjustments
11-4-1. TRANSPARENCY
Follow the procedure below to set the key transparency.
Open the keyer (DSK, KEY1 or KEY2) menu.
Turn F1 to select KEY SOURCE2 line.
In the KEY SOURCE2 line, turn F4 clockwise under the TRANSP parameter to make a
key with transparent background.

11-4-2. FAM ON/OFF


When signals with the same shape are being used for key source and key insert, setting the
FAM parameter to ON enables reduction of the darkness on the key edge. Follow the
procedure below to set the FAM to ON.
Open the keyer (DSK, KEY1 or KEY2) menu.
Turn F1 to select KEY INSERT line.
In the KEY INSERT line, turn F4 to set the FAM parameter to ON.

11-4-3. CLIP and GAIN


CLIP and GAIN are used to adjust how the key cut in the background is made and how the
foreground (key insert) and background signals are combined together. This is done by
setting the GAIN and CLIP parameters in each keyer menu.

Open the keyer (DSK, KEY1 or KEY2) menu.


Turn F1 to select KEY SOURCE2 line.
In the KEY SOURCE2 line, use the controls F2 and F3 to set the GAIN and CLIP
parameters respectively.

89
11-4-4. Gain Clip Processing Settings
Follow the procedure below to set the processing type of the keyer gain clip.
In the menu select section, press the SHIFT button to light up and press the
STATUS(SETUP) button to open the SETUP menu.
Turn F1 to select MU MODE, and then press F1 or the DOWN button to open the SETUP
- MU MODE menu.
In the SETUP-MODE menu, turn F1 to select KEYER line. In the KEYER line, turn F3 to
select the GAIN type. Press ENTER in the keypad to confirm the setting.

Setting Description
TYPE1 This applies gain based on the clip value (default setting)
TYPE2 This cuts the KEY signal up to the clip value, and then applies the gain

KEY signal
KEY signal after clip
KEY signal after gain

Clip Level

Video Level=0
TYPE1 TYPE2

NOTE
Note that CLIP, GAIN and FAM ON/OFF key settings will not be saved to Event
Memory data, if INPUT (default setting) is set for SET item in the KEYER line of the
SETUP - MU MODE menu. These setting data will be included with the system data. If
you want to save the data to the Event Memory as a keyer data, change the setting to
KEYER for the SET item.

90
11-5. Key Mask and Invert
The HVS-1000HS has mask and invert functions that let you alter key appearance by only
having only part of the key appear or by reversing the polarity of the key signal, respectively.

11-5-1. Key Invert


In the case of key invert, inverting the key means light areas in the picture will be displayed
dark and dark areas will be displayed light. To invert key signal when displaying over
background, proceed as below.

Setup a key and display the corresponding keyer menu.


Set the INVERT to ON in the KEY SOURCE1 line of the keyer menu.

Signal Invert Results:

C
o
m
KEY INVERT OFF
b
i
n
e

KEY INVERT ON

91
11-5-2. Box Mask
The HVS-1000HS has a box mask function that can be used to hide parts of the key that fall
outside the mask area. There is also an invert function that will cause parts of the key inside
the mask area to be hidden if that is what you need. To add a box mask and scale to it to the
size needed for your operations, proceed as follows.

Setup a key and display the corresponding keyer menu. In the menu select section,
pressing the keyer menu button (DSK, KEY1 or KEY2) with the SHIFT button light ON
allows the user to access the Key Mask line directly.
Select BOX_A (AND) or BOX_O (OR) for TYPE item in the MASK TYPE line. If you set
BOX_A, only the mask will affect the key source part of the key. If you set BOX_O, all key
signal components will be affected.
If necessary, set the mask width in the TOP/BOTTOM and LEFT/RIGHT parameter lines.
If you want to hide areas not covered by the mask, set MASK INVERT to OFF. If you want
to hide areas covered by the mask, set MASK INVERT to ON.

Signal Illustration:

BOX_A
Mc INV: OFF
Ao
Key Source Sm BOX_A C
Kb INV: ON
Box Mask
i o
n m
BOX_O
e INV: OFF b
i
BOX_O n
INV: ON
Key Insert
e

Background

92
11-5-3. DSK Mask (Option)
The procedure for using DSK as a mask for KEY1 or KEY2 is almost the same as when
setting up a regular key box mask. The DSK signal shape can also be used as a mask for
DSK, but the key and mask would be the same shape. (Mask is shown applied to KEY1 of
M/E2 in example below.)
Setup a key and display the corresponding keyer menu. In the menu select section,
pressing the keyer menu button (DSK, KEY1 or KEY2) while the SHIFT button light ON
allows the user to access the Key Mask line directly.

Select DSK_A or DSK_O for TYPE item in the MASK TYPE line. If you set DSK_A, the
area covered by the DSK mask pattern will consist entirely of background video.
If you set DSK_O, the area covered by the DSK mask pattern will consist entirely of key fill
video (Key Insert signal). If you set DSK_O, the area covered by the DSK mask pattern
will consist entirely of key fill video (Key Insert signal).
If necessary, set the mask width in the TOP/BOTTOM and LEFT/RIGHT parameter lines.
If you want to hide areas not covered by the mask, set MASK INVERT to OFF. If you want
to hide areas covered by the mask, set MASK INVERT to ON.

Signal Illustration:

DSK_A
Key Source INV: OFF
Mc
Ao
Sm
Kb DSK_A C
(DSK ‘diamond’ shape INV: ON
used as mask)
i o
n
e
m
DSK_O b
INV: OFF i
Key cut signal
of DSK n
DSK_O
e
INV: ON

Key Insert

Background

93
11-6. Edge and Shadow (Option)
Once you have made your key, you have the option of adding a colored edge and / or shadow to
the key. The edge application can be set ON / OFF as needed. If ON, the menus let you adjust
edge width, softness level, transparency and color. Outline is also possible in the edge settings.
The shadow effect has separate color settings from the edge effect and also has adjustable
softness and transparency levels. Effects are illustrated below.

Normal Key Edge Outline Shadow

To Add Edge
In the menu select section press the EDGE1(SHADOW1) (or EDGE2(SHADOW2) )button to
access the EDGE setting line in the KEY1 (or KEY2) menu directly.
In the EDGE STS line of the menu, turn F2 to set TYPE to either NORMAL or O_LINE. If you
set to NORMAL a border edge will be applied to the key. If you set O_LINE, the key will
appear in outline form only.
Once you set edge or outline, you can adjust width, softness and transparency of the effect
by changing the WIDTH, SOFT and TRANSP settings, respectively.
Turn F1 to go to the EDGE POS line to set the edge position.
Turn F1 to go to the EDGE COLOR line to set the edge color.

To Add Shadow
In the menu select section press the SHIFT button to light up. With the SHIFT button light ON
press the EDGE1(SHADOW1) (or EDGE2(SHADOW2) )button to access the SHADOW
setting line in the KEY1 (or KEY2) menu directly.
In the SHADOW line of the menu, turn F4 to set SELECT to ON.
Once you set shadow ON, you can adjust softness, transparency and position of the effect by
changing the SOFT, TRANSP and POS X, Y settings in the SHADOW STS line, respectively.
You can also set whatever color you want the key shadow to be by changing the settings on
the SHADOW COL parameter line.

NOTE
Note that if you set SHADOW POS Y to 4 or lower, the shadow is delayed one frame
relative to the key. If you want to use the key with a quick motion and set between 12
and -12 for the SHADOW POS X and between 6 and -6 for POS Y of it, use EDGE
POS XY instead of shadow's to prevent a delay.

94
11-7. Key Priority (Option)
Note that key priority can only be changed between KEY1 and KEY2. DSK is fixed to the highest
level, as it is a downstream key level.

To Change KEY1 / KEY2 Priority


Press the KEY1 OVER button in the Transition Control section to a lit indication. This will
move KEY1 to the KEY2 priority level and KEY2 to the priority level where KEY1 was
previously.
To return KEY1 and KEY2 to their original priority levels, just press the KEY1 OVER button to
an unlit indication.

BKGD KEY1 KEY2 DSK BLACK

TRANSITION
NOR NOR/REV REV FADER LIM SEQ LINK
RATE

MIX MIX MIX


WIPE WIPE WIPE
DVE DVE DVE
KEY1
FAM BLACK
OVER TRANS
NAM ON ON

BKGD KEY1 KEY2


CUT
NEXT TRANSITION

MIX WIPE DVE


(FAM) (NAM) MIX

TRANSITION TYPE

CUT DSK
AUTO
TRANS TRANS

Unlit Lit

M/E PGM M/E PGM

KEY1 KEY1
KEY2 KEY2
DSK DSK

95
12. Chromakeys
Chromakeys differ from regular keys in that the key is cut based on ignoring a certain color rather
than signal levels. For example, if blue (the normally used back drop color in chromakey studios) is
used, all blue areas in the source video are removed and video (CG or other picture) can be
inserted to the areas where the blue previously appeared. In the HVS-1000 series switchers
optional KEY1 and KEY2 support chromakey operations.

12-1. Chromakey Setup Flow


Note that if you do auto composite a chromakey using the switcher’s auto adjust function, you
can still manually "fine adjust" chromakey parameters after the auto chromakey has been made
if necessary. The following flow charts give general operational flow procedures when making
and adjusting chromakey either manually or automatically.

Chromakey Flow Example

When Auto Adjusting When Manual Adjusting

Select a background signal using PGM/PST bus.

In the keyer menu set TYPE to CHR.

Select KEY SOURCE/INSERT signals using AUX/KEY bus or keyer menu.

Transition key to appear on PREVIEW output to check results / adjust

In the keyer menu, set SELECT to In the keyer menu, adjust HUE,
ON to apply auto chromakey. ANGLE and/or ANGLE OFFSET
Move the crosshair to select the parameter settings until best
color to be ignored viewing the possible signal results are
image on the preview output obtained.
(POSITION-X-Y).

If best results not obtained, in the


keyer menu, manually readjust
HUE, ANGLE and/or ANGLE
OFFSET parameter settings

Adjust clip and gain levels as needed

After all above steps are completed, adjust for color cancellation,
suppression in the keyer menu. if necessary

96
12-2. Chromakey Setup
The chromakey auto setup function allows you to set the color should be ignored easily. The
following example gives the procedure to create a chromakey for KEY1 using the AUTO
CHROMAKEY menu and then to adjust it using MANUAL CHROMAKEY menu.

12-2-1. Auto Setup


Press a desired bus button in the PGM/PST bus section to select a background image.
Press KEY1 button in the BUS SELECT section. Then press a bus button in the
AUX/KEY bus section to select the Key Insert/Source pair signals for KEY1 using the Key
Link function. You can also select the Key Insert/Source signals using the KEY1 menu.
(Refer to section 11-2 “Bus Key Setup" for selecting key signals.)
Press the KEY1 button in the menu select section to open the KEY1 menu. Turn F1 to
select SOURCE1 line. In the SOURCE1 line of the menu, press F2 to change the TYPE to
CHR.

IMPORTANT
Once the CHR is set for TYPE, the INVERT, GAIN and CLIP parameters cannot be
available.

Turn F1 to select AUTO-CK line of the menu. In the AUTO-CK line, turn F4 to set the
SELECT to ON.
Press the KEY1 button in the NEXT TRANSITION section to display the KEY1 image to
the preview output.
Press the AUTO CK button in the joystick section to light up.
The X/Y crosshair lines should be visible on the PREVIEW output where the key is
displayed. If you want the crosshair lines to also appear on the PROGRAM line output
monitor, set the PGM parameter to ON in the CK-TYPE line.
The current crosshair position on the preview screen can be checked at the POS-X and
POS-Y parameters in the AUTO-CK line of the menu in real-time. Move the joystick
upward/downward or clockwise/counter-clockwise to position crosspoint on color to be
ignored. You can also set or finely adjust the crosshair position at POS-X and POS-Y
parameters in the keyer menu.
Move the joystick counter-clockwise with the Z button in the joystick lit to make a
chromakey. Once the joystick is moved counter-clockwise, cursor selected color should
be ignored and a chromakey should be automatically composited with background on the
preview line output.

97
12-2-2. Chromakey Adjustment
If the results of your chromakey are still not the best possible, you may need to additionally
adjust clip and gain levels to adjust the key cut parameters. You also may need to apply color
suppression to get the optimum possible chromakey results. Color suppression settings let
you adjust how color is cancelled and ignored when your chromakey is made.

Edge adjustment
Fine adjustment can be performed for the key edges when they do not appear smooth.
Follow the procedure below to make setting for KEY1 or KEY2.
Press the KEY1 (or KEY2) button in the menu select section to open the KEY1 or KEY2
menu.
Turn F1 to select the CK-EDGE line.
In the CK-EDGE line, turn F2 to set the POS parameter if set left/right edges together or
turn F3 and F4 to set the LEFT and RIGHT parameters if set left/right respectively.

Parameter Description Setting range


POS This moves the key process position to the right or left. -3 to 3
LEFT This widens or narrows the right-side key process position. 0 to 3
RIGHT This widens or narrows the left-side key process position. 0 to 3

Clip and Gain


Like normal keys, the CLIP and GAIN parameters at the menu can be used to adjust how the
key cut in the background is made and how the foreground (key insert) and background
signals are combined together. Follow the procedure below to make setting for KEY1 or
KEY2.
In the KEY1 or KEY2 menu, turn F1 to select the MANU ADJUST line.
In the MANU ADJUST line, turn F2 and F3 to adjust the CLIP and GAIN parameters.

Chroma Angle
Adjust color phase of the chromakey signal by changing the HUE setting. Follow the
procedure below to make setting for KEY1 or KEY2.
In the KEY1 or KEY2 menu, turn F1 to select the ANGLE line.
In the ANGLE line, turn F2 to adjust the phase of the color to be ignored at the ANGLE
parameter. If the color to be ignored is no uniform, make the angle wider.
Use each Y-LV, C-LV, and K-LV parameter in the ANGLE line to perform fine tuning of
the color setting.

ANGLE

HUE (Reference color)

98
Color Cancel and Suppression
If there is a discoloration on the foreground subject caused by the spill light from the
background color (normally blue), a blue fringe or tint may appear on the foreground subject.
In this case, use the color cancellation to remove the spilled color as below.
In the KEY1 or KEY2 menu, turn F1 to select the SUPPRESSION line.
In the SUPPRESSION line, turn F5 to set the COL CAN to ON (factory default). When set
to ON, the backing is suppressed to black and the spilled background color on the
foreground is reduced.
If the spilled color is not totally removed using the procedure above. The suppression
level can be also finely adjusted for each color signals (components). With the COLOR
CANCEL to ON, use the F2, F3 and F4 to adjust Y-LV, C1-V, and C2-LV parameters
respectively to help eliminate and correct any color spill that may occur.

99
13. Color Correction (Option)
HVS-1000CC Color Corrector and HVS-KYCC Color Corrector options provide Color Correction
and Proc Amp capabilities for HVS-1000 series switchers. These options support all HD/SD SDI
signal formats handled by HVS-1000 series switchers.

13-1. Color Correction Overview


Supports all inputs and output of HD SDI (multi-format) and SD SDI (multi bit-rate) digital
signal formats supported by HVS-1000HS
Provides 4 color correction channels: 2 channels (one HVS-1000CC option required) for
M/E bus and 2 channels (two HVS-KYCC options required) for keyers.
Able to apply Color Correction to each A/B, Effect BKGD, KEY1/2 and DSK bus.
Proc Amp includes Video Level, Chroma Level Chroma Phase and Black Level control.
Separate or group adjustment for RGB White/Black/Gamma levels.
Three Color Correction modes available: BAL(balanced), DIF(differential) and SEPIA.
Two Clip modes available: YPbPr(YCbCr) and RGB(GBR)
Color Correction, Clip Adjustment and Proc Amp settings can be stored in the event memory
and sequence memory.
Color Correction channels can be assigned to USER buttons.

13-2. Color Corrector Specifications


Up to one HVS-1000CC (software option) and two HVS-KYCC (one channel ea.) options can be
installed into HVS-1000HS. This means up to 4 channels of Color Correction channels can be
used in HVS-1000 series switchers. Note that the HVS-KYCC option must be installed into a
KEYER slot and it requires HVS-KYCC option. Installation of Color Corrector options enables
operations shown in the table below.

Color Corrector HVS-KYCC


HVS-1000CC
Channel CH1 CH2
Number of
2 1 1
channels
M/E, EFFECT BG,
Assignable bus KEY1 KEY2
DSK, AUX1-4
Output bus, Output bus,
Assignment type Input signal, Input signal,
Bus button Bus button
Luminance level, Chroma level, Luminance level, Chroma level,
Proc Amp
Chroma phase, Black level Chroma phase, Black level
Color Correction RGB White/Black/Gamma RGB White/Black/Gamma
Clip Adjustment YPbPr, RGB YPbPr, RGB

Color Corrector cannot be assigned to internally generated MATT or color bar signals. Use MATT CLIP
adjustment for MATT signals.

100
13-3. Color Correction Flow
Color correction can be set using the Color Correction menu. Press the OPT SEL button in the
menu select section to open the COLOR CORRECTION menu.

Select a color correction channel


CONTROL line Refer to 13-4
(CHAN)

Select a signal to be assigned to


CONTROL line Refer to 13-4
(TYPE, SELECT)

Enable color correction channel


CONTROL line Refer to 13-4
(Set ENABLE to ON)

Proc Amp Control Refer to 13-5


Luminance level (Y LEVEL) PROC CTRL1 line
Chroma level (C LEVEL) PROC CTRL1 line
Chroma phase (C PHASE) PROC CTRL1 line
Video level (V LEVEL) PROC CTRL2 line
Black level (BLACK) PROC CTRL2 line

Color Correction Adjustment Refer to 13-6


Select color correction mode (CC MODE) CC MODE line
BALANCE DIFFERENTIAL SEPIA
RGB WHITE LEVEL --- WHITE LEVEL line
RGB BLACK LEVEL --- BLACK LEVEL line
RGB GAMMA LEVEL --- GAMMA LEVEL line
RGB GAMMA CURVE --- CC MODE line
--- SAT CC MODE line
--- HUE CC MODE line

Clip Adjustment Refer to 13-7


Select clip mode (CLIP MODE) CLIP line
YPbPr (YCbCr) RGB
Y WHITE LEVEL --- YPbPr line
Y BLACK LEVEL --- YPbPr line
C WHITE LEVEL --- YPbPr line
--- WHITE LEVEL RGB line
--- BLACK LEVEL RGB line

101
IMPORTANT
To fully or partly initialize color correction menu settings, select under the INIT
parameter from ALL , PROC , CC or CLIP and then press and hold the relevant
function button down for a while.

13-4. Assigning Color Corrector Signals


To assign a signal to a color corrector channel, proceed as follows:
Press the OPT SEL button in the menu select section to open the COLOR CORRECTION
menu. Turn F1 to select the CONTROL line.
Turn F2 to select a color correction channel under the CHAN item. If 4 channels are
configured, select from CH1, CH2, KEY1 and KEY2.
To select a signal to be assigned to the selected color correction channel, at first specify the
control type (BUS, INPUT or BUTTON) under the TYPE item and then select a signal under
the SELECT item. (See the below tables.)

TYPE
Description
setting
Applies color correction to the specified bus. Any signal selected from the
BUS specified bus (except internally generated MATT and COLOR BAR) can be
adjusted using the color correction.
Applies color correction to the specified incoming signal. The selected signal can
INPUT be adjusted using the color correction regardless of which bus button it was
assigned to.
Applies color correction to the specified bus button. Any signal assigned to the
BUTTON
specified bus button can be adjusted using the color correction.

TYPE SELECT setting (signal selection)


setting HVS-1000CC HVS-KYCC
PGM(A-BUS)*, PST(B-BUS)*,
BUS KEY1 fixed or KEY2 fixed
EFFECT BG, DSK, AUX1 ~ 4
INPUT IN01~IN16, UTL IN, STIL1~4 IN01~IN16, UTL IN, AUX1 ~ 4
BLACK, WHITE, BUTTON1 ~ 16, BLACK, WHITE, BUTTON1 ~ 16,
BUTTON
MATT1, MATT2 MATT1, MATT2
When INPUT or BUTTON is set, HVS-1000CC and HVS-KYCC share settings. So the color correction
channel is applied to the selected signal or bus button on the M/E, KEY1 and KEY2 bus. If a different color
correction channel is applied to the same signal, the setting priority levels are as follows:
BUS > BUTTON > INPUT
* PGM/PST is set if the BUS TYPE setting in the SYSTEM-BUS CONTROL menu is P/P, A-BUS/B-BUS is
set if the setting is A/B. Note the program and preset buses should exchange places at the end of the
transition, if PGM/PST is set.

Turn F5 to ENABLE to ON to activate the color correction channel.


Now the selected video signal can be processed using Proc Amp, Color Correction and Clip
adjustment. Check and adjust the signal using a waveform monitor and vectorscope. Also
use an SDI monitor to compare between pre and post-processed images.

IMPORTANT
Color Correction channels can be assigned to USER buttons only when the control
type (TYPE) is set to INPUT or BUTTON. See section 13-8 “Assigning User Button
Signals” for more details.

102
13-5. Proc Amp
To adjust the video signal using Proc Amp, proceed as follows.
Refer to section 13-4 "Assigning Color Corrector” to assign a signal to the color correction
channel.
Press F1 to go to the PROC CTRL1 line or PROC CTRL2 line.
Use F2 to F4 to adjust the following parameters. (See the table below.)

Parameter Description Default Setting Range


Y LEVEL Adjusts luminance level. 100% 0% ~ 200%
C LEVEL Adjusts chroma level. 100% 0% ~ 200%
C PHASE Adjusts chroma phase. 0 -180 ~ 180
VIDEO LEVEL Adjusts video level. 0% 0% ~ 200%
BLACK LEVEL Adjusts black level. 0 -150~150

13-6. Color Correction


To adjust the video signal using Color Correction, proceed as follows.
Refer to section 13-4 "Assigning Color Corrector Signals” to assign a signal to the color
correction channel.
Turn F1 to go to the CC MODE line.
Turn F2 to select the color correction mode from BAL (balanced), DIF (DIFFERENTIAL) and
SEPIA (Sepia) under SELECT. Refer to section 13-6-1 “Balanced Mode and Differential
Mode” for more details about the difference between both modes.

If Balance or Differential is selected:


a) Use F3 to select the gamma curve type.
b) Use F1 to go to GAMMA LEVEL line, WHITE LEVEL line or BLACK LEVEL line.
c) Use F5 to adjust the level if setting R, G and B at a time. Use F2 to F4 to adjust the level if
setting R, G and B separately.

Line Parameter Description Default Setting Range


CC MODE G CURVE Selects gamma curve CENTER CENTER, BLACK, WHITE
GAMMA GRP_ADJ RGB group adjustment
100% 0% ~ 200%
LEVEL R/G/B RGB separate adjustment
WHITE GRP_ADJ RGB group adjustment
100% 0% ~ 200%
LEVEL R/G/B RGB separate adjustment
BLACK GRP_ADJ RGB group adjustment
LEVEL 100% 0% ~ 200%
R/G/B RGB separate adjustment

If Sepia is selected:
Use F4 and F5 to adjust SAT and HUE level.
Line Parameter Description Default Setting Range
SAT Adjusts saturation level. 25 0 ~ 100
CC MODE
HUE Adjusts hue. -160 -179 ~ 180

103
13-6-1. Balanced Mode and Differential Mode
When adjusting a video signal in balanced or in differential mode, the associated waveforms
will appear differently as shown below. (A 100% color bar signal is used in the following
example.)

(1) The figures below illustrate the change of the signal waveform when the WHITE level is
adjusted along the R axis in balanced or in differential mode. This also applies to G or B
axis.

1-a. BALANCE mode

When set to negative value: Default When set to positive value

1-b. DIFFERENTIAL mode

When set to negative value: Default When set to positive value

Notice that on vectorscope displays the signal level transition in the above example is
different between balanced mode and differential mode when observing the R, G or B axis
positive territories.

104
(2) The figures below illustrate the change of the signal waveform when the BLACK level is
adjusted along R axis in the balanced or in the differential mode. This will be also applied to G
or B axis.

2-a. BALANCE mode

When set to negative value: Default When set to positive value:


(The signal will be clipped)

2-b. DIFFERENTIAL mode

When set to negative value: Default When set to positive value:


(The signal will be clipped)

13-6-2. Gamma Curve


When performing gamma corrections, the following three adjustment type are available:

Center: Gamma curve is weighted toward the mid tones (near 50%).
White: Gamma curve is weighted toward Highlights (near 75%).
Black: Gamma curve is weighted toward Shadows (near 25%)

50% If CENTER is selected: 75% If WHITE is selected: 25% If BLACK is selected:


(default)

Correction
Range
Correction
Range

Correction
Range

Three type Gamma Correction Curves

105
13-7. Clip Adjustment
Clip settings can be selected from two types according to your system format; YPbPr (YCbCr)
clip or RGB clip. If set to Clip off in the menu, factory set default clip settings should be applied.
To set Clip adjustment, proceed as follows:
Refer to section 13-4 "Assigning Color Corrector” to assign a signal to the color correction
channel.
Turn F1 to go to CLIP line.
Turn F2 to select YPbPr or RGB under TYPE. See section 13-7-1 "YPbPr Mode and RGB
Mode” about the difference in adjustments between YPbPr mode and RGB modes.

If YPbPr selected:
In the YPbPr CLIP line, use F2 to F4 to adjust the following parameters. (See the table below.)

Parameter Description Default Setting Range


Y LEVEL Clips Y signal White level. 109% 50% ~ 109%
C LEVEL Clips C signal White level. 111% 50% ~ 111%
BLACK Clips Black level -7% -7% ~ 50%

If RGB selected:
In the RGB CLIP line, use F2 to F3 to adjust the following parameters. (See the table below.)

Parameter Description Default Setting Range (unit)


WHITE CLIP Clips White level 300% 50% ~ 300%
BLACK CLIP Clips Black level -200% -200% ~ 50 %

106
13-7-1. YPbPr Mode and RGB Mode
(1) YPbPr mode

(a) Y White Clip Level


Setting range: 50 to 109%
Default setting: 109%
109%
100%

Y White clip level range

50%

50%

0%

100% color bars when 100% white.

(b) Y Black Clip Level


Setting range: -7% to 50%
Default setting: -7%

100%

50%

50%
Y Black clip level range
0%

100% color bars when 0% Black

(c) C White Clip Level


Setting range: 50 to 111%
Default setting: 111%

50%

50%
111%
100%
50%

0%

100% color bars when color 100%

107
(2) RGB mode
Once “RGB clip” is selected, YPbPr input video signal is converted to RGB signal in the unit.
The converted RGB signal is processed so as not to exceed the RGB gamut range set per
RGB White and Black Clip menu parameters.
The processed RGB signal is then converted again to YPbPr format. This correction is used
to eliminate out-of RGB gamut problems.

IMPORTANT
Video process controls for Y LEVEL, C LEVEL, C PHASE, VIDEO LEVEL and BLACK
LEVEL are performed after a RGB gamut correction.

RGB Clip Processing White and Black cllip setting ranges are shown in the figure below.

300%

White clip
setting
range
100%

50%

0% Black clip
setting
range

-200%
RGB Clip Processing

108
13-8. Assigning User Button Signals
The Color Correction channel (CC channel) can be assigned to a user button. This facility is
available only when the color correction type in the menu is set to INPUT or BUTTON. When set
to BUS, this function cannot be used. The KEY/AUX bus buttons are used for assigning a signal
to the CC channel.

13-8-1. Assigning CC Channels to User Buttons


To assign a CC channel to a user button, proceed as follows:
Press the SHIFT button in the menu select section to light up
Press the STATUS(SETUP) button to open the SETUP menu.
Turn F1 to select 9 FREE ASSIGN. Press F1 or the DOWN button to open the FREE
ASSIGN menu.
Turn F1 to select the user button that you want to use. The selected user button becomes
flashing green.
Turn F2 to select TYPE under the FUNC item. And then press F2 to confirm the setting.
Turn F3 to select a CC channel (See the table below.) to be assigned to the user button
will flash green.

FUNC setting
CC1 SELECT (INPUT/BUTTON)
CC2 SELECT (INPUT/BUTTON)
CC KEY1 SELECT (INPUT/BUTTON)
CC KEY2 SELECT (INPUT/BUTTON)

Double-clicking the assigned user button will open the corresponding color correction menu.

13-8-2. Selecting a Signal


Press the user button where the CC channel is assigned. The KEY/AUX bus button lights
will turn off.
Press any bus button in the KEY/AUX bus to select a signal to be assigned to the CC
channel. When the color correction type is set to INPUT in the menu, the CC channel is
assigned to the input signal. When it is set to BUTTON, the CC channel is assigned to the
bus button.

109
14. Still Store
HVS-1000 series Hanabi switchers are capable of capturing and memorizing up to 4 still pictures
taken off the M/E output. Captured stills can then be used as M/E bus source for PGM, PST and
AUX/KEY. Once a still is assigned to a bus, it can be selected for production use same as any other
video sources. The captured stills can be also saved to/load from the CF card. Refer to section 17
“File Operations” for more details.

14-1. Still Capture and Save


Still video can be captured for later use by following the procedure below.

To Make a Still
Setup the image for program or preview line output to be captured to STILL1-4.
In the menu select section, press the STILL(FILE) button to access the STILL menu.
Turn F1 to select SIGNAL line. In the SIGNAL line of the menu, turn F2 to select the output
signal you want to capture the still at the SIGNAL item. Available settings are; PGM, CLN,
PRV, AUX1-AUX4, XAUX1-XAUX4, DVE KEY.
If you selected XAUX1-XAUX4, the following signals can be selected for capture of
STILL1-STILL4 at the STILL1 to STILL4 items respectively. Available settings are BLAK,
IN01-IN16, STL1-STL4, MATT1, MATT2, PGM, PRV, and CLN.
Turn F1 to select STILL TYPE line. In the STILL TYPE line, select FRAME, ODD or EVEN
field for TYPE.
Turn F1 to go back to the STORE line. Press F2, F3, F4, or F5) to save still picture 1, 2, 3, or
4, respectively, to memory. A ‘beep’ will be heard when the still is captured.

IMPORTANT
When pressing a control, press it lightly and release it within 1 sec. Note that if you
press and hold down a control for more than 1 sec., related operation will be
cancelled.

14-2. Assigning Bus


Once you have saved still pictures to memory, they can be bus assigned same as any other
production use signal according to the following proceed.

To Assign Where Stills Appear


In the menu select section press the SHIFT button to light on. With the SHIFT light on, press
the STATUS(SETUP) button to access the SETUP top menu.
Turn F1 to select BUS XPT. Then press F1 or the DOWN button to access the SETUP –
BUTTON XPT menu.
In the BUTTON XPT sub menu, turn F1 to select the name of the button you want to assign
the still to.
In the same line of the selected button, turn F2 to select the still signal (STIL1 - STIL 4) to be
assigned. Press the ENTER in the keypad to confirm setting.

110
15. Event Memory
HVS-1000 series Hanabi switchers can save operation panel setup statuses as data for recall when
needed. An event is the data for a setting status of the operation panel. This event is saved as data
and can be recalled when needed. This function can be used to instantly recreate the same setting
status. The event memory can store up to 200 events, numbered from 0 to 199.

15-1. Saving Events


Press the EVENT button on the keypad. The EVENT
button and keypad STORE and RECALL buttons
turn on. SEQ EVENT DVE CH DIRECT PATT

Press the STORE button. The event memory menu 7 8 9 STORE


is displayed on the menu screen. A list of the stored
events is displayed in the menu for 100 patterns. To
select from another 100 patterns, press the SHIFT
4 5 6 RECALL
button on the keypad.
Use the 0 to 9 buttons to enter the event that you
want to save, and then press ENTER to finalize the 1 2 3 +/-

selection.
Change the PGM output screen to the status that you 0 CLEAR SHIFT ENTER
want to save. Individual settings can be made for (CANCEL) (PAUSE) (PLAY)

storing data. Buttons light up to indicate that their


information (See the table below.) will be saved.

Keypad Stored data Menu button Stored data


7 Signal assignment for BKGD TRANS BKGD transition settings
4 Signal assignment for KEY1 KEY1. KEY1 transition settings
1 Signal assignment for KEY2 KEY2 KEY2 transition settings
0 Signal assignment for DSK DSK DSK transition settings
8 Signal assignment for EFFECT BKGD - -

Press the STORE button on the keypad. The status of the current operation panel is saved to
the event.

IMPORTANT
Once an event is saved, it can be modified or overwritten using the same procedure.
The current event information is displayed in the information section of the menu
screen.
CURRENT EVENT NO.: Currently selected event number
REMAIN EVENT: Number of events that can be added
Although up to 200 events can be saved, the adding of events is actually determined
by the remaining capacity of the entire memory. Both event and sequence data are
stored in shared memory, and a total of 200 slots for events and steps can be saved.
The number displayed for REMAIN EVENT is the remaining capacity (available slots)
for the entire memory area.

111
15-2. Recalling Events
15-2-1. Recalling Events Using Keypad (0-199)
Press the EVENT button on the keypad. The
EVENT button and keypad STORE and RECALL
buttons turn on. SEQ EVENT DVE CH DIRECT PATT

Pressing the RECALL button displays the event


7 8 9 STORE
memory menu on the menu screen. A list of the
stored events is displayed in the menu for 100
patterns. To select from another 100 patterns,
press the SHIFT button on the keypad.
4 5 6 RECALL

Use the 0 to 9 buttons to enter the event that you


want to recall, and then press ENTER to finalize the 1 2 3 +/-

selection.
Individual settings can be made for data to be
0 CLEAR SHIFT ENTER
recalled. Buttons light up to indicate that their (CANCEL) (PAUSE) (PLAY)

information (See the table below.) will be recalled.

Keypad Recalled data Menu button Recalled data


7 Signal assignment for BKGD TRANS BKGD transition settings
4 Signal assignment for KEY1 KEY1 KEY1 transition settings
1 Signal assignment for KEY2 KEY2 KEY2 transition settings
0 Signal assignment for DSK DSK DSK transition settings
8 Signal assignment for EFFECT BKGD - -

Keypad Operation
Used for overwrite control. To inhibit overwriting, select an event and press to light
5
up 5.
CLEAR Used to delete stored event data.

Press the RECALL button on the keypad. The stored event is loaded and the operational
settings on the panel are recalled.

IMPORTANT
If the 5 button on the keypad is pressed when recalling events, the selected event can
be set to overwrite disable. Pressing the CLEAR button on the keypad deletes the
selected event.

112
15-2-2. Recalling Events Using USER Buttons (0-7)
Using USER buttons makes recalling events No.0 to No.7 an easier process. To recall events
using user buttons, proceed as follows:
Assign an event recall function (EVENT No.00 RECALL ~ EVENT No.07 RECALL) to a
user button. Refer to section “4-3-3 User Buttons” for how to assign the function to a
USER button.
Press the USER button where an event is already stored (lit orange). The stored event is
loaded and the operational settings on the panel are recalled quickly.

IMPORTANT
Note that the saved bus information is always recalled whenever the event recall is
performed using user buttons.

113
16. Sequence Operation
16-1. Overview of Sequence Function
A sequence is a function for joining individual settings and statuses on the operation panel into a
data set for linked playback as a single operation. Up to 20 sequences can be saved. Each
sequence is comprised of data called steps, and a maximum of 50 steps can be stored in a
sequence. When creating a sequence, the steps serves as the basic building block, and it must
be created first. Once steps are created, interpolation is automatically performed to link the
steps smoothly and create one single, continuous sequence.

The procedure for creating sequences is shown below.

Select sequence

Edit sequence
Add/Delete steps
Number of stored 20 sequences
sequences max.
Set/Modify steps Number of steps in
50 steps max.
one sequence
Total available steps in
200 steps
Make sequence all sequences
playback settings

Check sequence playback Play back sequence

Functions and Information Available for Sequence Control


XPT information for each bus (except AUX Keyer settings (shadow is not supported in
and INPUT PREV) interpolation mode)
Transition type for each bus Keyer priority setting
Transition direction WIPE modify settings
Transition time (except for rate value
DVE pattern modify settings
information)
PGM output bus(es) WIPE assignment pattern number
NEXT TRANSITION settings DVE assignment pattern number
Line DVE assignments

Functions and Information Not Available for Sequence Control


Event memory Sequence edit function
MATT color information SETUP menu information
STILL STORE operation FILE operation

IMPORTANT
Sequence steps and events share the same memory, and up to 200 data slots can be
saved. When the memory is full, the sequence editing function cannot be used.

114
16-2. Editing Sequences
Sequences are edited using the SEQUENCE menu and keypad.

IMPORTANT
Selecting the sequence number under the NUMBER parameter of the
SEQUENCE menu changes the OU to SEQUENCE mode, and pressing the SEQ
button on the keypad changes the keypad to SEQUENCE Editing mode. When the
keypad is mentioned in this section, it does not refer to the normal keypad for numeric
input but the SEQUENCE Editing keypad.

Operation item Operation section Operation Refer to


Open the SEQUENCE Menu selection Press the USER (SEQ) button when
1 menu section the SHIFT button is lit.
Select the number under the 16-2-1
2 Select the sequence SEQUENCE menu NUMBER parameter (change OU to
SEQUENCE MODE).
Cancel overwrite
protect setting SEQUENCE menu Set PROTECT parameter to OFF. 16-2-2
Change the keypad to Press the SEQ button so that it lights
SEQUENCE Editing On keypad orange. A pop-up is displayed in the 16-2-3
mode (*1) menu screen.
Create new Keypad Press STORE (STEP ADD). 16-2-4
step
Use +/- to move in the forward
Keypad direction, and SHIFT and +/- to move
Select step in the reverse direction. 16-2-5
Use the SELECT parameter to
SEQUENCE menu select.
3
Add step Keypad Press STORE (STEP ADD).
Editing Insert step Keypad Press 9 (STEP INSERT). 16-2-6
Overwrite Press RECALL (STEP
Keypad
step OVERWRITE).
Delete step Keypad Press CLEAR and then ENTER. 16-2-8
Copy/Paste Press 2 (STEP COPY) to copy and 3
step Keypad (STEP PASTE) to paste. 16-2-7
Interpolatio Use the INTERP parameter to make
SEQUENCE menu 16-2-9
n mode setting for each transition.
Duration SEQUENCE menu Use the DUR parameter to set. 16-2-10
Delete sequence SEQUENCE menu Use the DELETE parameter. 16-2-11
Return keypad to
4 On keypad Press the SEQ button to exit.
normal mode
16-2-12
Return the NUMBER parameter to
5 Exit SEQUENCE mode SEQUENCE menu OFF.

IMPORTANT
For details about settings during sequence playback, see section 16-3 “Playing Back
Sequences.” Also, the OU cannot perform event memory operations or user pattern
editing using the keypad when in SEQUENCE MODE.

115
16-2-1. Displaying the SEQUENCE Menu
Press the SHIFT button in the menu select section to turn on the button light, and then press
the USER(SEQ) button to display the SEQUENCE menu.

Selecting a sequence
Turn the F1 control to select the SEQ SET line in the menu screen. Turn the F2 control, and
then use the NUMBER parameter to select the sequence number to be edited. The display in
the information section at the top of the menu changes from NORMAL MODE to SEQUENCE
MODE, and various information is displayed on the menu screen.

Sequence information
If one of the sequences is selected under the NUMBER parameter in the SEQUENCE menu,
the OU changes to SEQUENCE MODE, and various information about SEQUENCE editing
is displayed in the information section on the menu.

IMPORTANT
If the OU is operating in the USER PATTERN mode (See the menu information
section.), turning F2 to select a sequence at the SELECT parameter in the USER
PATTERN menu will not switch to SEQUENCE mode. First you will have to exit the
USER PATTERN mode and return to the NORMAL mode (by turning F2 at the first
line of the USER PATTERN menu to select OFF.) And then turn F2 in the first line of
the SEQUENCE menu to switch to the SEQUENCE mode. You cannot switch
between USER PATTERN mode and the SEQUENCE mode directly.

Display information Description


SEQUENCE MODE Indicates that the OU is in SEQUENCE MODE.
CUR SEQ No Displays the currently selected sequence number.
CUR STEP No Displays the currently selected step number.
REST OF STEP Displays the remaining number of steps available.
TOTAL STEP Displays the total number of steps in the currently selected sequence.

HVS-1000EOU SEQUENCE MODE JOY STICK CTRL : DVE POS


POSX : 1200
CUR SEQ :05 TOTAL STEP :10 POSY : 1300
CUR STEP :01 REST OF STEP :100 SIZEX/Y : 300
SEQUENCE

SEQ SET NUMBER 05 PROTECT OFF DELETE OFF


INTERP BKGD LINE KEY! LINE KEY2 LINE DSK LINE
PLAY STS LOOP ON LINK ON DIR NORMAL TOTAL DUR 100

STEP STS SELECT 1 CUR DUR 10 BREAK ON


XPT ENABLE 1 BKGD ON KEY1 ON KEY2 ON DSK ON
XPT ENABLE 2 EFF BKGD ON
CTRL ENABLE 1 BKGD ON KEY1 ON KEY2 ON DSK ON
CTRL ENABLE 2 BLACK OFF

SEQ SET NUMBER PROTECT DELETE


5 OFF OFF
[1/8] SELECT

116
The following operations are available in the SEQUENCE menu. For details about the
respective parameters, refer to the relevant sections.
Parameter
Line Description Refer to
name
NUMBER Used to select the sequence number for editing. 16-2-1
SEQ SET PROTECT Used to set the selected sequence to overwrite protect. 16-2-2
DELETE Used to delete the selected sequence. 16-2-11
BKGD
KEY1 Used to display the sequence interpolation information for
INTERP 16-2-9
KEY2 the BKGD, KEY1, KEY2, DSK, and EFF BKGD buses.
DSK
Used to set if loop playback is performed. Loop playback is
LOOP enabled when set to ON. 16-3-4
Used to set if the fader is linked to playback. When set to
PLAY STS LINK 16-3-5
ON, the fader or AUTO button is linked to playback.
DIR Used to select the playback direction.
TOTAL DUR Used to set the total duration value of the sequence. 16-2-10
SELECT Used to select a step. 16-2-5
SETP
STS DUR Used to set the duration value of the selected step. 16-2-10
BREAK Used to set the break for the step. 16-3-6
BKGD
XPT KEY1
ENABLE1 Used to select the bus crosspoint during saving or the
KEY2 current bus crosspoint for each transition during sequence 16-3-2
DSK playback.
XPT EFF BKGD
ENABLE2
BKGD
CTRL KEY1
ENABLE1 KEY2 Used to set each bus saved information is played back or
not for during sequence playback. 16-3-5
DSK
CTRL BLACK
ENABLE2
CH1
Used to set each color correction channel (CH1, CH2,
CC CH2
KEY1, KEY2)information is applied or not for during 13
ENABLE KEY1
sequence playback.
KEY2

16-2-2. PROTECT Setting (Menu)


Before editing sequences, set the PROTECT parameter in the SEQUENCE menu to OFF. To
prevent changes or overwriting to the sequence, set the PROTECT parameter to ON.
Turn the F1 control to align the cursor with the PAT CTRL line.
Turn the F3 control to set to the PROTECT parameter

IMPORTANT
Playback settings can still be made when PROTECT is set to ON.

117
16-2-3. Setting the Keypad to SEQUENCE Editing
Press the SEQ button on the keypad to light the button. The keypad changes to SEQUENCE
editing, and the window displays a pop-up on the menu screen indicating the SEQUENCE
editing functions.

Keypad for SEQUENCE editing

CTRL CTRL STEP STEP


7 8 9 STORE BKGD BLACK INSERT ADD

CTRL OVER
4 5 6 RECALL KEY1 WRITE

CTRL STEP STEP INC


1 2 3 +/- KEY2 COPY PASTE DEC

CTRL STEP SHIFT


0 CLEAR SHIFT ENTER DSK DELETE

Keypad pop-up display

The buttons with circled characters cannot


be used when the PROTECT set to ON.

Keypad
Button function Operation
display
Used to add the current operation panel status to the sequence.
STEP ADD STORE After adding the step, the sequence moves to the next step.
Used to overwrite the current operation panel status or copied step
OVERWRITE RECALL information to the current step.
STEP INSERT 9 Used to insert a step.
INC / DEC +/- Used to select a step.
+/-: Forward direction
SHIFT / PAUSE SHIFT
SHIFT and +/-: Reverse direction
STEP COPY 2 Used to copy a step.
STEP PASTE 3 Used to add a copied step as a new step.
STEP DELETE CLEAR Used to delete a step.
CTRL BKGD 7 Used to set if the BKGD transition is played back.
CTRL BLACK 8 Used to set if the BLACK transition is played back.
CTRL KEY1 4 Used to set if the KEY1 transition is played back.
CTRL KEY2 1 Used to set if the KEY2 transition is played back.
CTRL DSK 0 Used to set if the DSK transition is played back.
AUTO PLAY ENTER Used to perform automatic playback.

IMPORTANT
Even when a menu other than the SEQUENCE menu is displayed, if the OU is in
SEQUENCE mode, pressing the SEQ button changes the keypad to SEQUENCE
editing.

118
16-2-4. Creating New Steps (Keypad)
If no step is saved to the selected sequence, a new step needs to be created first. The
following procedure is used to create a step.
Create the video that you want to save as a step.
In the SEQUENCE editing keypad, press STORE (KF ADD) to create a new step.

16-2-5. Selecting Steps (Menu/Keypad)


The number of the currently selected step (Current Step) can be checked under the
following parameters.
Section Parameter
Information section of the menu CUR STEP No
SEQUENCE menu STEP STS line SELECT

Steps can be moved by using the following keypad buttons.


Button Function Description
+/- STEP INC This moves to the next step.
+/- + SHIFT STEP DEC This moves to the previous step.
The steps can also be selected by using the SELECT parameter.

16-2-6. Adding and Overwriting Steps (Keypad)


Steps can be added in one of two ways, by pressing the 9 button for the INSERT parameter
or by pressing the STORE button for the ADD parameter.

Before adding steps


Total number of steps: 5 / Current step: 3
1 2 3 4 5

Using STEP INSERT to add step


The current operating status is created as a new step before the current step.
1 2 3 4 5 6
The step 3 is inserted as a new step so that the total number of steps becomes step 6, and
the current step becomes step 3.
The steps 3, 4, and 5 before adding are moved back to become steps 4, 5, and 6,
respectively.

Using STEP ADD to add step


The current operating status is created as a new step after the current step.
1 2 3 4 5 6
The step 4 is inserted as a new step so that the total number of steps becomes step 6, and
the current step becomes step 4.
The steps 4 and 5 before adding are moved back to become steps 5 and 6.

Overwriting steps
Press the RECALL button on the keypad. The current operating status is overwritten to the
current step.

119
16-2-7. Copying and Pasting Steps (Keypad)
Use the keypad +/- and SHIFT buttons to select the step to copy.
Press the keypad 2 button to copy the step information.
Select the target step for copying. The step information is inserted as a new step before
the target step.
Press the 3 button on the keypad to insert the new step.

16-2-8. Deleting Steps (Keypad)


Use the keypad +/- and SHIFT buttons to select the step to delete.
Press the keypad CLEAR button.
Press the ENTER button to delete the step. Pressing CLEAR before pressing ENTER
will cancel the operation.

16-2-9. Selecting the Interpolation Mode (Menu)


The interpolation mode can be set for each transition in a sequence.
Turn the F1 control to align the cursor with the INTERP line.
Turn the F2 control to select the interpolation mode for the BKGD, KEY1, KEY2, and
DSK parameters.

The operation of each interpolation mode is illustrated in the diagram below.


LINE: Linear SMOOTH: Curve
CUT: No Interpolation
Interpolation Interpolation

16-2-10. Setting the Duration (Menu)


The default setting for keyframe duration is 30 (relative ratio). And it also means 30 frames
unless the TOTAL DURATION is changed. The duration can be set for each step.
Turn the F1 control in the SEQUENCE menu to align the cursor with the STEP STS line.
Turn the F2 control, and then use the SELECT parameter to select the step. (Select Step
1 when setting the duration between step 1 and step 2.)
Turn the F3 control, and then use the DUR parameter to change the duration.

IMPORTANT
The TOTAL DUR parameter in the SEQUENCE menu determines the transition
length. It is set in frame units. Once the TOTAL DUR is changed, each keyframe
length is also changed accoriding to the TOTAL DUR and DUR values. However, each
DUR value is not changed, indicating relative ratio of the total transition length.

120
16-2-11. Deleting Sequences
This procedure deletes all setting information in a sequence.
Turn the F1 control to align the cursor with the SEQ SET line.
Turn the F2 control to select the sequence using the NUMBER parameter.
Turn the F4 control to set the DELETE parameter to ON. Press the F4 control to display
the confirmation pop-up on the menu.
Turn the F4 control to align the cursor with YES, and then press F4 to perform the delete
operation. If the cursor is aligned with NO, pressing F4 will cancel the operation.

16-2-12. Exiting Sequence Editing


Press the SEQ button to turn off the button light to return to the normal keypad. The
sequence editing pop-up is closed, and steps can no longer be added or deleted.
To exit all sequence operations (editing and playback), turn F2 to set 0 under SELECT in the
first line of the SEQUENCE menu. This will make the OU to exit the SEQUENCE mode and
the to return to NORMAL mode.

16-2-13. Backing Up Sequence Data


Each sequence can be backed up to and reloaded from the CF card. In the FILE menu, select
P* for the sequence file extension. (See section 17. "File Operations" for details.

NOTE
The keyframes of User Preset patterns are not saved to the CF card. If the keyframes
of User Preset patterns are included in the sequence, do not forget to restore the panel
settings after reloading sequence data.

121
16-3. Playing Back Sequences
Sequences are played back using the SEQUENCE menu and keypad. To play back a
sequence, change the OU to SEQUENCE MODE, and then change the keypad to SEQUENCE
editing for operation.

IMPORTANT
When the keypad is mentioned in this section, it refers to the normal SEQUENCE
Mode keypad.

Operation
Operation item section Operation Refer to
Menu
Open the SEQUENCE Press the USER (SEQ) button when the
1 selection
menu SHIFT button is lit.
section
16-2-1
Select the number under the NUMBER
SEQUENCE
2 Select the sequence parameter (change OU to SEQUENCE
menu MODE).
Change the keypad to Press the SEQ button so that it lights
SEQUENCE Editing On keypad orange. A pop-up is displayed in the menu 16-2-3
mode (*1) screen.
This sets if the crosspoint information is
Crosspoint Keypad played back for each bus in the XPT 16-3-2
setting ENABLE1 and 2 lines.
This sets if each transition is played back
Keypad at 7, 8, 4, 1, and 0.
Bus setting 16-3-3
SEQUENCE This sets if each transition is played back
menu at the CTRL ENABLE1 and 2 lines.
3 Playback
setting Loop SEQUENCE This sets the PLAY SYS line LOOP
setting menu parameter.
SEQUENCE This sets the PLAY SYS line LINK
Fader link 16-3-4
menu parameter.
Playback SEQUENCE This sets the PLAY SYS line DIR
direction menu parameter. 16-3-5
SEQUENCE This sets the STEP SYS line BREAK
Break 16-3-6
menu parameter.
Press ENTER (AUTO PLAY) for automatic
Playback Keypad 16-3-1
playback.
Press the SEQ button to turn off the button
4 Return keypad to normal On keypad light.
16-2-12
SEQUENCE
5 Exit SEQUENCE mode This returns the NUMBER parameter to 0.
menu

NOTE
For details about the SEQUENCE menu, see section 16-2-1 “Displaying the
SEQUENCE Menu.” For details about the SEQUENCE editing keypad, see section
16-2-3 “Setting the Keypad to SEQUENCE Editing.”

16-3-1. Sequence AUTO PLAY


Pressing the ENTER button on the keypad executes AUTO PLAY for the current sequence,
and it stops when the final step is finished playing. If the LOOP setting is made in the menu,
playback loops until the SHIFT button is pressed. Also, the CUT parameter is used to switch
between the final step and first step during loop playback. To perform smooth operation, set
the first and final steps to the same setting.

122
16-3-2. Setting Crosspoint Playback
During sequence playback, you can select to use the bus crosspoint during saving or the
current bus crosspoint for each transition. When set to ON, the crosspoint during saving is
used, and when set to OFF, signals on the bus can be selected and used.
Turn the F1 control to align the cursor with the SEQ SET line.
Turn the F2 control, and then use the NUMBER parameter to select the sequence.
Turn the F1 control to align the cursor with the XPT ENABLE1 line or XPT ENABLE2 line.
Turn the F2 to F5 controls to make the settings for each bus.

16-3-3. Bus Settings


Pressing the 0, 1, 4, 7, and 8 buttons on the keypad enables playback selection of the bus
during sequence playback. Each time the target button is pressed, the color of the button light
changes between orange and green. The setting is ON when the button is lit orange,
indicating that the corresponding bus information is played back during sequence playback.
When the button is lit green, the setting is OFF and the corresponding bus information is not
played back.

Key Corresponding bus Key Corresponding bus


0 DSK 7 BKGD
4 KEY1 8 BLACK TRANS
1 KEY2

IMPORTANT
The same transition playback settings can be made for each parameter in the CTRL
ENABLE1 and 2 lines of the menu.

16-3-4. Selecting Loop Playback


When set to ON, loop playback is enabled during sequence AUTO PLAY.
Turn the F1 control to align the cursor with the SEQ SET line.
Turn the F2 control, and then use the NUMBER parameter to select the sequence.
Turn the F1 control to align the cursor with the PLAY STS line.
Turn the F2 control to set the LOOP parameter.

Loop playback is performed if the sequence AUTO PLAY is executed when the setting is ON.
Pressing the SHIFT button pauses playback while it is in progress. Pressing the ENTER
button again restarts playback from the point where it was stopped.

123
16-3-5. Using Fader Link for Sequence Playback
Sequence playback can be linked to fader lever operation.
Turn the F1 control to align the cursor with the SEQ SET line.
Turn the F2 control, and then use the NUMBER parameter to select the sequence.
Turn the F1 control to align the cursor with the PLAY STS line.
Turn the F3 control to set the LINK parameter to ON.

Setting this parameter to ON enables playback of the current sequence using fader lever and
AUTO button operation.

Playback of a sequence with 5 total steps

Single transition

1 2 3 4 5
The sequence plays in a loop by performing a transition until the final point.

Likewise, if the SEQ LINK button in the transition section is pressed during SEQUENCE
MODE and the button is lit, the fader link is enabled. Pressing the button again will turn off the
button light and disable the fader link. During sequence playback using the AUTO button,
pressing the AUTO button again performs operation based on the AUTO parameter setting
in the SYSTEM-MU MODE menu.

Setting Description
PAUSE This pauses sequence playback.
CUT This stops playback and returns to the status in the first step.
This plays in reverse from the position where the AUTO button was
RETURN
pressed.

IMPORTANT
*The buses where the XPT ENABLE1 and 2 lines are set to ON cannot be operated
during fader link. See section 16-3-2 “Setting Crosspoint Playback.”

124
16-3-6. Break Settings during Fader Link
Setting this parameter to ON enables breaks at a target step during sequence playback using
fader link.

Turn the F1 control to align the cursor with the SEQ SET line.
Turn the F2 control, and then use the NUMBER parameter to select the sequence.
Turn the F1 control to align the cursor with the STEP STS line.
Turn the F2 control, and use the SELECT parameter to select a step.
Turn the F4 control to set the BREAK parameter to ON.

BREAK during fader link playback


When sequence playback is performed using fader link, the step where BREAK is set to ON
becomes the final point of the transition.

Sequence with 5 total steps and steps 2 and 4 set to BREAK ON


Single Single Single
transition transition transition

1 2 3 4 5
The sequence plays in a loop using a total of three transitions.

125
17. File Operations
HVS-1000 series Hanabi switchers are capable of storing operational data to the CF memory card
and also of recalling and downloading previous card saved data for application to production
operations. Operational data which can be card saved / downloaded includes; up to 4 ea. JPG,
TARGA stills, pattern list / pattern modification data, panel setup (button selections, etc.) and
system setup (for OU / MU response, other parameters). (Refer to Appendix 2. for a quick
reference as to which files can be used with CF cards.)

17-1. CF Card
For available CF memory cards, see "Available File List" in the Appendix. Inserting and
removing of the CF card should be performed slowly and firmly.

Card Access Lamp


The indicator at the CF card drive turns red when saving or reading data to/from the CF card.
Check access to the CF card while performing the operations. While viewing the FILE menu, the
FILE button lights orange.

IMPORTANT
Do not remove the CF card while the FILE button is lit red. This could corrupt the
stored data or damage the card.

Card Space Indicator


To check the available space, insert the CF card into the card slot, and then, in the menu select
section, press the STILL(FILE) button with the SHIFT button lit to open the FILE menu. The
available space in the inserted CF card is displayed at the top right of the FILE menu.

17-2. Saving Data to CF Cards


Operational data files can be saved to memory card using the following procedure. See "File
Extensions" in the Appendix for which file formats of the operational data can be saved to card
by HVS-1000 series switchers.

To Save Data to Card


First insert a formatted CF card into the card drive on the operation panel.
Press the SHIFT button in the menu select section to light on. Then press the STILL(FILE)
button to display the FILE top menu. In the FILE menu, turn F1 to select SAVE, and then
press F1 or the DOWN button to open the sub menu.
Turn F2 to select the TYPE of data you want to save to the card.
If multiple files are displayed in the menu, turn F3 to select which file you want to save.
Once you have selected the file you want to save to, press F4 to send the file to the CF card.
A message “SAVE or RENAME?” will pop up. Turn F4 to select SAVE to save the data. If you
want to rename the file, select RENAME and then refer to the section 17-5 "Renaming Saved
Files” to give a new name to the file.
If the same file exists in the CF card already, a message “OVERWRITE?” will pop up that
warns you that if you overwrite the existing file. Turn F4 to select CANCEL, OVERWR
(overwrite) or REMAME. If you want to overwrite the file, select OVERWR. If you want to
cancel the operation, select CANCEL. If you want to rename the file to save it, select

126
RENAME and refer to the section 17-5 "Renaming Saved Files” to give a new name to the
file.
A "beep" sound will be heard when the data is sent.

NOTE
When pressing a control, press it lightly and release it within 1 sec. Note that if you
press and hold a control for more than 1 sec., related operation will be cancelled. Do
not try to remove the CF card from the card drive while the CF card access lamp lights
red.

17-3. Downloading from CF Cards


All operational data file extensions that are saved on CF cards can be downloaded using the
following procedure See "File Extensions" in the Appendix for which file formats can be
downloaded from card by the HVS-1000 series Hanabi switchers
To Download files from CF Card
First insert a CF card containing data files into the card drive on the control panel.
Press the SHIFT button in the menu select section to light on. Then press the FILE button to
display the FILE top menu. Turn F1 to select SEND. Then press F1 or the DOWN button to
open the sub menu.
In the sub menu, turn F2 to select the TYPE of data you want to download from the card.
If multiple files are displayed in the FILE menu, turn F3 to select which file you want to
download.
If you want to load an image file, turn F4 to select which still memory (STILL1 to STILL4) the
downloaded data to be saved to.
Turn F4 to download the data. A "beep" sound will be heard when the data is downloaded.

To Download files from CF Card


First insert a CF card containing data files into the card drive on the control panel.
Press the SHIFT button in the menu select section to light on. Then press the FILE button to
display the FILE top menu. Turn F1 to select SEND. Then press F1 or the DOWN button to
open the sub menu.
In the sub menu, turn F2 to select JP* or TG* for the TYPE.
If multiple files are displayed in the FILE menu, turn F3 to select which file you want to
download.
Turn F4 to select the file format when writing to stills.

Setting Description
STL1 - STL4 File sent to STILL1, STILL2, STILL3 or STILL4 in standard format.
STL1 C - STL4 C File sent to STILL1, STILL2, STILL3 or STILL4 in centered format.
STL1 T - STL4 T File sent to STILL1, STILL2, STILL3 or STILL4 in tiled format.
Animation source files sent to and saved as a combined file to STILL1,
STL1 L~STL4 L
STILL2, STILL3 or STILL4.

Press F4 to download the data. A "beep" sound will be heard when the data is downloaded

127
17-4. Deleting Memory Card Files
Any data file saved to CF cards can be deleted using the following procedure if you need to
make more space on a card or simply no longer need the files.

To Delete Memory Card Files


First insert a CF card containing data files into the card drive on the operation panel.
Press the SHIFT button in the menu select section to light on. Then press the FILE button to
display the FILE top menu. Turn F1 to select SEND. Then press F1 or the DOWN button to
open the sub menu.
In the sub menu, turn F2 to select the TYPE of data you want to delete from the card.
Turn F2 to select the TYPE of data you want to delete from the card.
If multiple files are displayed in the FILE menu, turn F3 to select which file you want to delete
from the displayed file list.
Turn the F1 control to align the cursor with the OPERATE line.Turn F2 to change the
DELETE item to ON in FILE menu and press F2 to delete selected file data from the card. A
"beep" sound will be heard when the data is deleted.

NOTE
When pressing a control, press it lightly and release it within 1 sec. Note that if you
press and hold a control for more than 1 sec., related operation will be cancelled. Do
not try to remove the CF card from the card drive while the CF card access lamp lights
red.

128
17-5. Renaming Saved Files
The user can input an identifying name of up to 8 alphanumeric characters for any file stored to
CF cards. Existing files can also be named / renamed using the following procedure.

To User Name or Rename a Card File


First insert a CF card containing data files into the card drive on the operation panel.
Press the SHIFT button in the menu select section to light on. Then press the FILE button to
display the FILE top menu. Turn F1 to select SEND. Then press F1 or the DOWN button to
open the sub menu.
In the sub menu, turn F2 to select the TYPE of data you want to rename on the card.
Turn F3 to select the SELECT of data you want to rename on the card.
Turn F1 to go to the OPERATE line.
Turn F3 to select character (0 to 7 from the left) to be changed in the selected file.
Turn F4 to change the currently selected character.
Repeat steps 6 and 7 to change each character in the name of the selected file.
When all needed characters are input, press F3 below RENAME in the menu. A "beep"
sound will be heard when the changed name is saved as the new file name.

17-6. Aborting File Transfer


During saving or loading of a file, file transfer can be canceled while the percent progress is
displayed. Use the following operation.
Press F4 under SAVE or SEND. YES/NO confirmation will be displayed.
Set to YES and then press F3 to abort transfer. It takes several seconds to complete
processing after aborting the operation.

129
18. Additional Features
In addition to signal switching features explained thus far, the SETUP menu of the HVS-1000 series
switchers also allows users to make several settings and checks that are more of a convenience
nature.

18-1. OU Setup
Operation settings, such as the brightness of the menu screen, buzzer sound mode, fader lever
and joystick response, and screensaver, can be made in the SETUP-OU MODE menu. To
access the OU MODE menu page, use the F1 control in the SETUP top menu (see the figures
below) to select the respective submenu, and then press the F1 control or the DOWN button.

18-1-1. Display Brightness and Contrast


Use F2 or F5 in the LCD CONTROL line of the menu to set the brightness level for the
display.

Setting
Line Parameter Description Default
Range
BRIGHT Adjusts brightness level of the screen. 6 0-31
LCD
CONTROL Adjusts brightness level of the back
BACKLIG 16 0-31
light.

18-1-2. Fader Lever Response


Turn F4 and F5 in the FADER line of the menu to set gain and offset fader movement factors.

Setting
Line Parameter Description Default
Range
GAIN Adjusts fader lever gain response 1.00 0.90 to 1.10
FADER
OFFSET Adjusts fader lever offset response 1.00 0.00 to 2.00
See section 7-4-2 “Fader Operational Settings" about fader operational settings.

18-1-3. Screen Contrast


Turn F3 and F4 in the LCD CONTROL line of the SETUP-OU MODE menu to adjust the
screen contrast.
Setting
Line Parameter Description Default
Range
LCD CNTR-VH 20 0-31
Adjusting Screen Contrast
CONTROL CNTR-VL 21 0-31

130
18-1-4. Menu Shift Button Response
Turn F4 in the OU CTRL line of the SETUP-OU MODE menu to select the Menu Shift button
response.
Line Setting Control Description Default Setting Range
Shift button in the Menu
OU CTRL MENU SHIFT TOGGLE TOGGLE, PUSH
Select Section.

TOGGLE: A menu printed in the upper line of a menu button is displayed when the respective menu
button is pressed with the SHIFT button unlit. After the SHIFT button is pressed to light
on, the menu in parentheses ( ) is displayed when the respective menu button is pressed.
PUSH: The menu in parentheses ( ) is displayed when the respective menu button is pressed
while the SHIFT button is pressed and held

18-1-5. Warning Buzzer


Turn F2 in the BUZZER line of the menu to set buzzer sound ON/OFF or choose among
following type options. Use F3 and F4 to select buzzer sound level and tone.

Line Parameter Description Default Setting Range


TYPE1, TYPE2,
TYPE Buzzer setting TYPE1 TYPE3, TYPE4,
OFF
VOLUME
BUZZER (S/N 9990066 Volume setting 31 0-31
or Higher)
TONE
(S/N 9990066 Tone setting NORMAL LOW, NORMAL, HIGH
or Higher)

Following four kinds of indication buzzer available:


(1) Operational alarm buzzer (three short beeps sound)
(2) Page overflow alarm buzzer (two short beeps sound)
(3) Confirm setting buzzer when rebooting system, initiating menus, saving/loading files, handling
events, etc. (one long beep sound)
(4) Other indication buzzer for operational setting (one short beep sound)

TYPE1: Enables all four kinds of buzzer:


TYPE2: Enables all four kinds of buzzer, but uses one short beep sound for all.
TYPE3: Enables three kinds of buzzer except (1).
TYPE4: Enables only (3) and (4).
OFF: Mutes all buzzer sounds.

18-1-6. Joystick Response


Turn F2 in the JOYSTICK line of the menu to set the joystick electrical response.

Line Parameter Description Default Setting Range


Sets the joystick
JOYSTICK JOYSTICK NOR LOW, NOR, HIGH
response level.

131
18-1-7. Screen Saver
Use F2, F3 and F4 in the SCR SAVER line of the menu to make screen saver settings for the
panel display.

Setting
Line Parameter Setting Description Default
Range
SELECT F2 Sets screen saver ON/OFF. ON ON, OFF
SCREEN TIME,
TYPE F3 Selects screen saver type. TIME
SAVER HANABI
MIN F4 Defines wait time (in minutes). 5 1 to 60

18-1-8. Date/Time Setting


Turn F1 in the SETUP top menu to select DATE/TIME. Press F1 or the DOWN button to
display the SETUP-DATE menu. When you change the date or time setting, press F5 to
apply the change. (This feature is available on the HVS-1000HS units with a serial number
higher than 9870038.)

Parameter Description
DATE YEAR, MONTH, DAY Date setting
TIME HOUR, MIN, SEC Time setting
APPLY Applies setting

18-1-9. Mode
Turn F4 in the OU CTRL line of the SETUP-OU MODE menu to select the pattern list display
mode.
Line Parameter Description Default Setting Range
Sets pattern list pop-up
display ON/OFF when 1: Displays pop-up
OU CTRL MODE 1
selecting a WIPE or DVE 2: Not display pop-up
pattern.

132
18-2. Advanced Signal Settings
18-2-1. Selecting and Adjusting Sync Signal
HVS-1000 series switchers can accept analog black burst and tri-level sync signals as an
external reference. The black burst (BB) signal is used as a reference for SDTV and tri-level
sync signal or BB signal can be selected for HDTV. HVS-1000HS main unit has each sync
signal input (TRI-SYNC IN and BB IN connectors) and each connector has a loopthrough
output for other system equipments. Which signal to be used in the system can be set in
menu. The main unit also has a REF OUT connector. You can select a sync signal to be
output from the REF OUT in the menu.
Also note that the phase of the BB signal can be adjusted when inputting to and outputting
from the unit. And the phase of the tri-sync signal can be adjusted only when outputting from
the unit. These settings should be done in the SETUP-SYSTEM menu. To access the
SETUP - SYSTEM menu, press STATUS(SETUP) button with the SHIFT lit in the menu
select section to open the SETUP top menu, then turn F1 to select 1 SYSTEM and press F1
or the DOWN button to open the SYSTEM setting menu.

Selecting a System Sync Signal


Turn F3 in the REF line of menu to select a sync signal to be used in the system.

Setting Setting
Line Parameter Description Default
Control Range
1080/59.94i, BB,
Selects sync 1080/50i, BB TRI S
REF IN F2 signal to be 720/59.94p
used. Other HD signals TRI S TRI S
SD signals BB BB

BB: Black Burst signal


SETUP: 7.5% Setup Black Burst signal
TRI S: Tri-level Sync signal

Selecting a sync signal output from the REF OUT Connector


Turn F3 in the REF line of menu to select a sync signal output from the REF OUT connector
on the rear panel of the MU.

Para Setting
Line meter Control Description Default Setting Range
1080/59.94i, 1080/50i, BB, TRI S,
Selects BB
720/59.94p SETUP
REF OUT F3 sync Other HD signals TRI S TRI S
signal to
be output NTSC BB BB, SETUP
PAL BB

133
Adjusting Input Sync Signal Phase. (BB only)
Setting
Line Parameter Description Default Setting Range
Control
Coarse adjustments of the subcarrier
COARSE F2 0 -170 to 170
phase.
SC PHS
Fine adjustments of the subcarrier
FINE F3 phase. 0.0 -15.0 to 15.0
1080/50i -19 to 19
Horizontal 1080/59.94i, -15 to 15
REF IN H PHASE F2 phase 720/59.94p 0
adjustments NTSC -15 to 15
PAL -19 to 19

Adjusting Output Sync Signal Phase.


Setting
Line Parameter Description Default Setting Range
Control
1080/50i -1314 to 1314
1080/60i, 1080/59.94i, -1094 to 1094
1080/24p, 1080/23.98p,
Horizontal 1080/24sF, -1369 to 1369
OUT H PHASE F2 phase 1080/23.98sF 0
PHASE adjustments
720/59.94p, 720/60p -819 to 819
NTSC -852 to 852
PAL -858 to 858
V PHASE F3 Vertical phase adjustments 0 -100 to 100

18-2-2. Safety Area Markers


Two types of marker functions are available: Safety Area marker and Side Cut marker (HD
only). Marker functions are set in the SETUP-OUTPUT menu. To access the SETUP -
OUTPUT menu, press STATUS(SETUP) button in the menu select section to open the
SETUP top menu then turn F1 to select 3. OUTPUT and press F1 or the DOWN button to
open the marker setting menu shown below.

Setting
Line Parameter Control Description Default Setting Range
Sets the CLEAN output
OUT F2 OFF OFF, ON
ON/OFF.
PGM, PST, ME A,
OUT ME B, KEY1, KEY2,
D KEY1,
DVE KEY F3 Selects signal for DVE KEY. PGM
D KEY2, D KEY3, D
KEY4,
ME KEY
Sets safety area marker
ENABLE F2 OFF OFF, ON
ON/OFF.
SAFETY PGM OFF, 90K, 85K, 80K,
SAFETY PRV 90B, 85B, 80B,
SAFETY AUX1 TYPE F3 Selects marker type. OFF 85B+80K, 90B+85K,
SAFETY AUX2 90B+80K, 85B+80B,
SAFETY AUX3 90B+85B, 90B+80B
SAFETY AUX4 Sets the cross marker
CROSS F4 indicating the picture center OFF OFF, ON
to ON/OFF
SIDE PGM Sets side cut marker
ENABLE F2 OFF OFF, ON
SIDE PRV ON/OFF. (HD only)
SIDE AUX1 TYPE F3 Selects marker type. LINE LINE, TRANSP
SIDE AUX2
SIDE AUX3 Sets the transparency level
TRANSP F4 50 0 to 100
SIDE AUX4 if TYPE set to TRANSP.

134
18-2-3. MATT CLIP
If you are using the color matt signal for productions, chroma / luminance clip processing at
matt top and bottom edges can be used to eliminate out-of gamut problems. This can be
done in the SETUP-MU MODE menu. MATT CLIP setting is applied to not only bus matt but
also all other matt colors set in menu. To access the SETUP - MU MODE menu, press
STATUS(SETUP) button in the menu select section to open the SETUP top menu then turn
F1 to select MU MODE and press F1 or the DOWN button to open the matt clip setting menu
shown below.

Setting
Line Parameter Control Description Default Setting Range
ADJ1 F2 0 -20 to 20
MATT Adjusts top edge.
CLIP T ADJ2 F3 0 0 to 50
CLIP F4 Adjusts clip. ON ON, OFF
MATT ADJ1 F2 0 -20 to 20
Adjust bottom edge.
CLIP B ADJ2 F3 0 0 to 50

Figure examples below illustrate how upper and lower range settings affect signal results
shown in waveform monitor using the arrowhead display. An area marked with diagonal lines
that are not actually displayed in the waveform monitor indicates legal range. Note that only
changes for TOP settings are shown at examples (1) - (4), while BOTTOM settings remain at
default (ADJ1 = 0, ADJ2 = 0). In examples (5) - (8), only BUTTOM settings changes are
shown while TOP settings stay to default (ADJ1 = 0, ADJ2 = 0).

(1) If TOP-ADJ1 to higher setting: (2) If TOP-ADJ1 to lower setting:


Y signal level
Y signal level

C signal level C signal level

(3) If TOP-ADJ2 to higher setting: (4) If TOP-ADJ2 to lower setting:


Y signal level
Y signal level

C signal level C signal level

(5) If BOTTOM-ADJ1 to higher setting: (6) If BOTTOM-ADJ1 to lower setting:


Y signal level

Y signal level

C signal level C signal level

135
(7) If set higher at BOTTOM-ADJ2: (8) If BOTTOM-ADJ2 to lower setting:
Y signal level

Y signal level
C signal level C signal level

18-2-4. Ancillary Data


The switcher supports the pass-through, blank and insert of ancillary data of the Program
(Clean) and Preview outputs. It blanks the ancillary data area in the video stream, and then
inserts the selected data. It can also pass-through or blank the ancillary data area of the
Auxiliary outputs respectively. The settings can be done in the FUNCTION - ANCILLARY
menu. The factory default setting is OFF (blank).

PROGRAM (CLEAN) and PREVIEW Outputs


Select OUTPUT in the SETUP top menu to display the OUTPUT submenu.
Turn F2 to go to the ANCI BUS SEL line. In the ANCI BUS SEL line turn F2 (PGM SEL)
or F3 (PREV SEL) to select AUX1 to 4, EFFECT BG or OFF. If you want to blank the
ancillary data area, set to OFF (default). If you want to pass or insert ancillary data, select
the ancillary data source (AUX1 to AUX4 and EFF BG).
XPT LV item in the ANCI BUS SEL line determines when the ancillary signals are
switched during transition. If it is set to 50, they are switched in the halfway point of the
transition.

IMPORTANT
The clean outputs use the same ancillary data setting as for the program outputs. The
embedded ancillary data (AUX1 to AUX4) will output from the Program or Preview bus
even when the corresponding ANC DATA ENABLE item is set to OFF.

Auxiliary Outputs
Select OUTPUT in the SETUP top menu to display the OUTPUT submenu Turn F2 to go to
the ANCI BUS SEL line. In the ANCI BUS SEL line use F2 to F5 to select OFF or ON for
AUX1 to AUX4.
If set to OFF: Blanks the ancillary area.
If set to ON: Passes through the ancillary data.

Block Diagram for Ancillary Data Processing

Blanks the Sets ancillary


Inserts data output
PGM(CLN)-> ancillary area.
data. PGM->
ON/OFF.

Blanks the Inserts Sets ancillary


PREV(PST)-> ancillary area. data. data output PREV->
ON/OFF.

Selects Selects
data. data.
Sets ancillary
AUX1-> data output AUX1->
ON/OFF.

Sets ancillary
AUX4-> data output AUX4->
ON/OFF.

136
18-3. User Default
User default is a function that allows the user to change the parameter defaults from the factory
defaults to user-selected values. Once a user default is saved, whenever the parameters or
menu are initialized, the saved user default values are used as the default values. The user
default values can be saved or recalled in one operation.

Saving the user default


Set the values that you want to save as the parameter values.
Press the ENTER button while holding down the STATUS(SETUP) button. With a few
exceptions, all menu values are saved as the user default.

IMPORTANT
The following parameters are not saved to the user default.
Parameters in the WIPE MODIFY and DVE MODIFY menus
Parameters in the SETUP-SYSTEM menu
Parameters in the SETUP-OU MODE menu

Recalling the user default


All of the preset user default values can be recalled in a single operation.
Press the RECALL button twice while holding down the STATUS(SETUP) button. The
RECALL button becomes flashing red. Press the RECALL button again to load the saved
user default values.

Restoring the factory default


The default values can be restored to the factory default from the user default.
The default values are restored to the factory defaults by performing the system initialization
operation. For details about system initialization, see section 16-5-1 “Initialization.”

18-4. Data Recovery


In some cases, the settings may be inadvertently altered in the event recall or copying/swapping
operations. When this happens, the data recovery function can be used to restore to the state
before the data was recalled.

Immediately after the faulty recall, press the STATUS(SETUP) button to open the SETUP top
menu.
Turn F4 to set X-BUFF to ON. Then, press F4. The recalled values are canceled, and the
original values are restored.

137
18-5. Reboot and Initialization
18-5-1. Initializing the System
Press STATUS(SETUP) button with the SHIFT lit in the menu select section to open the
SYSTEM top menu.
Turn F1 to select SYSTEM and press F1 or the DOWN button to open the
SETUP-SYSTEM menu shown below.
Turn F1 to select the INIT line. In the INIT line, turn F2 to select which types of
initialization you want such as CUR, SYS and ALL. Then Press and hold down F2 at least
1 sec to initialize data. A "beep" sound will be heard when the data is initialized.

Setting Description
All parameter data for MATT, PATTERN SELECT, KEY1, KEY2 and DSK
CUR
menus will be reinitialized. Related data can be saved to event memory.
Reinitialize only SYSTEM data settings. Related data cannot be event
SYS
memory saved.
ALL Reinitialize all system setup data

18-5-2. Initializing OU Mode MENU


Only OU related data in the SETUP-OU MODE menu can be reinitialized using the OU INIT.
Press STATUS(SETUP) button with the SHIFT lit in the menu select section to open the
SYSTEM top menu.
Turn F1 to select OU MODE and press F1 or the DOWN button to open the SETUP-OU
MODE menu shown below.
Turn F1 to select the UTILITY line. In the UTILITY line, turn F5 to set to ON. Then press
and hold down F5 at least 1 sec to initialize data. A "beep" sound will be heard when the
data is initialized.

18-5-3. System Reboot


Press STATUS(SETUP) button with the SHIFT lit in the menu select section to open the
SYSTEM top menu.
Turn F5 to set REBOOT to ON. Then press and hold down F5 at least 1 sec to initialize
data. A "beep" sound will be heard when the MU is initialized.

IMPORTANT
Items requiring re-start display REBOOT MU on the menu screen are as follow:
All settings in the SETUP - MU MODE menu
ARCNET ID setting in the SETUP-NETWORK menu
IP ADDRESS and NETMASK settings in the SETUP-NETWORK menu

138
19. Interface Settings
19-1. GPI and Tally Control
HVS-1000HS units have GPI IN / OUT interface capability to allow other devices to initiate
switcher operations and for output of switcher operational status / tallies to other devices. You
can also set pre and post delays to ensure switcher response matches to overall system
operational requirements.
Use of GPI IN/OUT pins can be freely assigned within GPI IN, GPI/TALLY OUT and TALLY1-5
sub-menu pages of the SETUP-GPI/TALLY menu. Additionally, tally signal output use and color
indication must be defined using TALLY COLOR sub-menu page of the SETUP - GPI/TALLY
menu.

19-1-1. GPI IN Free Assignments


To assign GPI inputs and outputs proceed as follows.
Turn F1 to select GPI IN in GPI/TALLY menu.
Press F1 or DOWN button to display GPI IN sub-menu page.

1. TRANS・・・・・ 2 2

PIN NO.
EFFECT
PRE DELAY
POST DELAY

For GPI IN pin hardware assignments see section 2-2-3 “Interfaces."


Turn control F1 to select SETUP line. In the SETUP line, turn F2 to select the pin you are
making the assignment for. Selected pin number will be displayed at the P NO. parameter
block. The screen will switch to display the pin No.8 and higher settings.
Next, turn F3 to set how the pin displayed at the P NO. parameter block is used. The
number set at the EFFECT parameter block assigns how the pin is used.

EFFECT Setting Description


ASPECT 4:3⇔16:9
(Open:4:3, Short:16:9) Sets aspect ratio of the output signals.
TRANS-TYPE BKGD-AUTO Triggers a background auto transition.
TRANS-TYPE KEY1-AUTO Triggers a KEY1 auto transition.
TRANS-TYPE KEY2-AUTO Triggers a KEY2 auto transition.
TRANS-TYPE DSK-AUTO Triggers a DSK auto transition.
Triggers an auto transition of the bus selected at
TRANS-TYPE NEXT-TRANS AUTO NEXT TRANSITION section.
TRANS-TYPE BLACK AUTO Triggers a black transition.
TRANS-TYPE BKGD-FAM Changes background transition type to FAM.
TRANS-TYPE BKGD-NAM Changes background transition type to NAM.
TRANS-TYPE BKGD-CUT Changes background transition type to CUT.
TRANS-TYPE KEY1-CUT Changes KEY1 transition type to CUT.
TRANS-TYPE KEY2-CUT Changes KEY2 transition type to CUT.
TRANS-TYPE DSK-CUT Changes DSK transition type to CUT.
TRANS-TYPE BKGD-MIX Changes background transition type to MIX.

139
EFFECT Setting Description
TRANS-TYPE KEY1-MIX Changes KEY1 transition type to MIX.
TRANS-TYPE KEY2-MIX Changes KEY2 transition type to MIX.
TRANS-TYPE DSK-MIX Changes DSK transition type to MIX.
TRANS-TYPE BKGD-WIPE Changes background transition type to WIPE
TRANS-TYPE KEY1-WIPE Changes KEY1 transition type to WIPE.
TRANS-TYPE KEY2-WIPE Changes KEY2 transition type to WIPE
TRANS-TYPE BKGD-DVE Changes background transition type to DVE
TRANS-TYPE KEY1-DVE Changes KEY1 transition type to DVE.
TRANS-TYPE KEY2-DVE Changes KEY2 transition type to DVE
*SEQUENCE PLAY Triggers to play a sequence.
*SEQUENCE PAUSE Triggers to pause a sequence.
Triggers an auto sequence play with SEQ LINK
*SEQUENCE AUTO TRANS enabled.
* The commands with * (asterisk) can be used only when a sequence number is selected
in the menu.

If necessary, a preset delay and / or post delay can be set at the D PRE and D PST
parameter blocks respectively. One of both of these may be needed to match switcher
response to overall system operations. Setting range for both parameters is 0 – 15 fields.
D PRE sets how long control input is received for initiation to occur. D PST sets how long
initiate condition is held after command received and initiated.
Setting GPI IN ON/ OFF can also be done. When GPI IN is to ON here, turn F1 to select
ENABLE line. In the ENABLE line, turn F2 to set ENABLE to ON.

IMPORTANT
The GPI IN ON/OFF can be assigned to a USER button. Once the function is assigned
to a USER button, turning the USER button on/off allows users to set GPI IN to
ON/OFF and pressing the USER button twice will open the GPI IN menu. See section
4-3-3 “USER Button" for more details about the assignement.

140
19-1-2. GPI/TALLY OUT Free Assignments
In this case, GPI/TALLY OUT setting made is used to assign when and how tally signal
indications are output when either of the Hanabi series tally unit options are configured.
Turn F1 to select GPI/TALLY OUT in GPI/TALLY menu.
Press F1 or DOWN button to display GPI/TALLY OUT sub-menu page.

1. BKGD・・・・・・ 1 0

PIN NO.
EFFECT
PRE DELAY
POST DELAY

For GPI/TALLY OUT pin hardware assignments see section 2-2-3 “Connectors."

Turn control F2 to select the pin you are making the assignment for. Selected pin number
will be displayed at the P NO. parameter block. Continue turning control F1 to display the
pin No.6 and higher settings.
Next, turn control F2 to set how the pin displayed at the P NO. parameter block is used.
The number set at the EFFECT parameter block assigns how the pin is used.

EFFECT Setting EFFECT Setting


NOT USED RED TALLY ME PREV
GPI OUTPUT01 to 16 (*1) RED TALLY ME CLN
BKGD TRANSITION GREEN TALLY BLACK
KEY1 TRANSITION GREEN TALLY IN01 to IN16
KEY2 TRANSITION (GREEN TALLY UTILITY IN) (*2)
DSK TRANSITION GREEN TALLY STILL1 to STILL4
BKGD AUTO TRANSITION GREEN TALLY MATT1 to MATT2
KEY1 AUTO TRANSITION GREEN TALLY WHITE
KEY2 AUTO TRANSITION GREEN TALLY ME PGM
DSK AUTO TRANSITION GREEN TALLY ME PREV
RED TALLY BLACK GREEN TALLY ME CLN
RED TALLY IN01 to IN16 ASPECT 16:9 TALLY
(RED TALLY UTILITY IN) (*2) ASPECT 4:3 TALLY
RED TALLY STILL1 to STILL4 KEY1 ON TALLY
RED TALLY MATT1 to MATT2 KEY2 ON TALLY
RED TALLY WHITE DSK ON TALLY
RED TALLY ME PGM
(*1) GPI OUTPUT01-16 can be assigned to USER buttons. See section 4-3-3 “USER button".
(*2) UTL IN input on the MU rear panel. The UTL IN input signal can be used to the bus
assignment signals same as primary inputs if theUTL-IN TYPE in the SETUP-BUS
CONTROL menu is set to INPUT. (The factory default setting is CAMRTN.)

If necessary, a preset delay and / or post delay can be set at the D PRE and D PST
parameter blocks respectively. One or both of these may be needed to match switcher
response to overall system operations.
Setting range for both parameters is 0 – 15 field. D PRE sets how long control input is
received for initiation to occur. D PST sets how long initiate condition is held after
command received and initiated.

141
19-1-3. TALLY Free Assignments
Color responses are determined by settings made at the GPI/TALLY – TALLY COLOR menu
in the TALLY parameter block. To set the tally outputs proceed as follows.
In the SETUP - GPI/TALLY menu, turn control F1 to select TALLY COLOR. Then press
F1 or the DOWN button to display the TALLY COLOR menu.
In the TALLY COLOR menu, turn control F1 to select the bus to be set. Turn F2 to select
tally color indication. When setting the AUX outputs, use F2 to F5 to select tally color for
each output. (Available settings are; NON, RED, GRN and R&G.)
Press UP button to go back to SETUP - GPI/TALLY menu page.
In GPI/TALLY menu, turn F1 to select the TALLY output in 4(TALLY1) to 8(TALLY5).
Then press F1 or DOWN button to display each TALLY sub menu page.

1 RED TALLY---

PIN NO. EFFECT

IMPORTANT
When connecting a tally unit, use the RS-422 connector on the MU rear panel. Up to 5
tally units can be connected by cascading. Trasmission settings such as baud rate and
parity can be set in the SETUP-RS-422 menu. Refer to HVS-TALOC/TALR, Hanabi
series tally unit operation manual for more details.

When setting the tally unit, turn F1 to align the cursor with the ENABLE line. Then set the
corresponding tally unit to ON to activate the unit. Each pin assignment of the tally unit
should be displayed on the menu screen.
Turn F2 to select the pin you are making the assignment for. Selected pin number will be
displayed at the P NO. parameter block.
Next, turn control F2 to set how the pin displayed at the P NO. parameter block is used.
The number set at the EFFECT parameter block assigns how the pin is used.
EFFECT Setting
RED TALLY BLACK
RED TALLY IN01 to IN16
(RED TALLY UTILITY IN)
RED TALLY STILL1 to STILL4
RED TALLY MATT1 to MATT2
RED TALLY WHITE
RED TALLY ME PGM
RED TALLY ME PREV
RED TALLY ME CLN
GREEN TALLY BLACK
GREEN TALLY IN01 to IN16
(GREEN TALLY UTILITY IN)
GREEN TALLY STILL1 to STILL4
GREEN TALLY MATT1 to MATT2
GREEN TALLY WHITE
GREEN TALLY ME PGM
GREEN TALLY ME PREV
ASPECT 16:9 TALLY
ASPECT 4:3 TALLY
KEY1 ON TALLY
KEY2 ON TALLY
DSK ON TALLY

142
* Setting Example
TALLY COLOR menu TALLY1-5 menu
Example
OUTPUT COLOR P NO. EFFECT
Example1 PGM RED 1 RED TALLY-IN01
Example2 PGM RED 2 RED TALLY-MATT1
Example3 PGM GREEN 2 RED TALLY-MATT1
Example4 PGM R&G 2 GREEN TALLY-M/E1 STILL4
Example5 AUX01 GREEN 64 GREEN TALLY-STILL4

Example1: If IN01 input signal is output to the PGM line, red tally will be produced at the
pin 1 in the selected TALLY unit.
Example2: If MATT1 signal is output to the PGM line, red tally will be produced at the pin
2 in the selected TALLY unit.
Example3: No tally color will be produced at pin 2 in the selected TALLY unit, because
GREEN is set in TALLY COLOR block while RED indication is selected at
EFFECT block.
Example4: If STILL4 signal is output to the PGM line, green tally will be produced at the
pin 2 in the selected.
Example5: If STILL4 signal is output to the AUX1 line, green tally will be produced at the
pin 64 in the selected TALLY unit.

143
19-2. Editor Control
To configure an editor and make editor settings use the following parameters in the EDITOR
menu.

Parameters Description Setting Range


TYPE Com protocol used GVG-100 (default), BVS-3000
Adds delay to offset timing OFF: No delay
DELAY (*1) mismatch ON: Delay added (default)
ENABLE ON: Editor control disabled
Editor control ON/OFF
(*2) OFF: Editor control enabled (default)
ME ME operation when ENABLE is set to ON.
PVW PVW operation when ENABLE is set to ON.
Selects which ALL ME and PVW operation when ENABLE is set to ON.
SELECT
(*3) bus used by the BVS3K M/E operation regardless of the ENABLE setting.
editor. ME ON ME and PVW operation when ENABLE is set to ON.
PVW operation regardless of the ENABLE setting.
PVW ON ME and PVW operation when ENABLE is set to ON.
NORMAL 100 wipe patterns are available at editor (default)
Selects how pattern
WIPE selections are made by 10 WIPE and 10 DVE patterns each can be saved at
editor LIST pattern lists (as no. 80-99) at editor. (When
GVG-100 is set)
BAUD Sets baud rate 9600, 19200, 38400(default)
PARITY Sets parity NONE, ODD(default), EVEN
Crosspoint switching command from the editor by specifying the
INPUT input connector number (default).
XPT CTRL Sets XPT
(*4) control type Crosspoint switching command from the editor by specifying the
BUTTON bus button number.
PATT Sets pattern ON Accepts pattern commands from the editor(default).
SELECT selection
ON/OFF OFF Not accept pattern commands from the editor.
Sets keyer ON Accepts keyer commands from the editor(default).
KEYER
CTRL commands Not accept keyer commands from the editor
ON/OFF OFF (Receiving “ALL STOP” command does not set keyers OFF.)

(*1) If DELAY set to OFF, command delay for DVE processing can be removed. Once command delay is
removed, MIX or WIPE transition can start at IN point of the effect, but note that in this case DVE transition
operation and commands normally issued from OU will be delayed by one frame, for example, a
background image can be accidentally seen for a moment at the beginning of the switching.
(*2) The switcher will be editor controlled only when the ENABLE is set ON.
(*3) When PVW, PVW ON or ALL is set for SELECT, AUX1 will be editor controlled as an Edit Preview bus.
(*4) Refer to the tables below to specify the number for the signals when the XPT CTRL is set to INPUT or to
BUTTON.
BUTTON INPUT
Number to be specified Button number Number to be specified Input signal
0 BLACK 0 BLACK
1-8 1-8 1-16 IN01-IN16
9-16 9-16 (SHIFT plus1 to 8) 17 UTILITY IN
17-18 MATT1-2 27 COLOR BAR
19 WHITE (SHIFT plus BLACK) 28 WHITE
29-32 STILL1-4
33-34 MATT1-2

IMPORTANT
The EDITOR ON/OFF function can be also assigned to a USER button. Once the
function is assigned to a USER button, turning the USER button on/off allows users to
set EDITOR to ON/OFF and pressing the USER button twice will open the EDITOR
menu. See section 4-3-3 “USER Button" for the assignement.

144
19-3. Network Settings
19-3-1. Arcnet (Option)
To connect the MU and the OU using an Arcnet, an Arcnet option board is required for the
MU and the OU respectively. Consult your dealer for more details.

OU and MU are configured for ARCNET as below


For the MU and OU to communicate, use the BNC cable to connect an Arcnet port of each
unit. If you want to connect other devices to the Arcnet, use the other Arcnet port of the MU or
the OU. If the MU or the OU is the last device in the network, the other port has to be 75 ohm
terminated. Refer to section 3-2 “Optional Configuration" for Arcnet configuration and
operation manual for HVS-AUX16/32 (Hanabi Auxiliary unit).

Arcnet Setting
Press STATUS(SETUP) button with SHIFT button lit in the menu select section to open
the SYSTEM top menu.
Turn F1 to select NETWORK and press F1 or the DOWN button to open the
SETUP-NETWORK menu.
The factory default settings for the ARCNET are shown in the table below. Change
ARCNET settings only when if necessary. If the MU ID or OU ID is changed, press
ENTER in the keypad to confirm the setting.

Setting
Parameters Description Default
Range
Sets Arcnet ID for the OU (if Arcnet option board
OU 1 1-255
is installed to the OU).
Selects MU Arcnet ID controlled by the OU (if
CTRL 250 1-255
Arcnet option board is installed to the OU).
D-sub,
CTRL MU Selects which port is used when controlling MU. D-sub
Arcnet
Sets Arcnet ID for the selected MU (if Arcnet
MU 250 1-255
option board is installed to the MU).
Accessible MU ID(s) will be shown under the ACTIVE MU ID item in the menu. If you want to
disconnect the MU from the OU on the Arcnet, select any ID other than shown in the ACTIVE
MU ID block.

IMPORTANT
To configure an Arcnet connection, an optional Arcnet board is required for the MU
and the OU respectively. If any Arcnet boards are not installed, Arcnet setting
parameters will not be displayed in the SETUP-NETWORK menu.

145
IMPORTANT
Regarding ARCNET Expansion:
ARCNET system can be configured up to 100 m total.
If you are configuring one each OU and MU via ARCNET, connect them in P2P
(peer-to-peer) configuration and leave MU and OU to factory default set ID numbers
(250 and 1 respectively).
If you are configuring multiple OUs and MUs, different ID numbers will need to be set
for each unit and additional connection cables will be required. Please consult your
FOR-A supplier regarding needed items for your configuration.
Before downloading system data from an installed memory card, verify ARCNET ID
currently assigned to OU and MU for operation is the same as in the data being
downloaded. If a conflicting ARCNET ID (one assigned to another OU or MU in the
network) is downloaded and applied, network operation will fail after download is
complete.
Additionally, OU and / or MU will need to be briefly powered OFF and then powered
ON again to apply the downloaded system data to production operations. If ARCNET
ID has been changed by the download, new ID will not be valid until switcher units are
powered ON again.
If ARCNET ID conflict has occurred and network communication fails, change the ID
of the conflicting unit to a valid network ID.
To do this briefly turn unit power OFF at the OU or MU in conflict. Turn power back ON
at OU and remake network settings. (For related OU and / or MU as needed.) Turn
power back ON at conflicting MUs only after network settings have been remade at the
controlling OU.

146
19-3-2. Ethernet (Option)
Multiple units can be also be configured to communicate via LAN (Ethernet 10BASE-T /
100BASE-TX) MU interface connection. Related settings must be made in the SETUP-NET
WORK menu.
MU IP Address and Mask Settings
Press STATUS(SETUP) button with SHIFT button lit in the menu select section to open
the SYSTEM top menu.
Turn F1 to select NETWORK and press F1 or the DOWN button to open the
SETUP-NETWORK menu.
Turn F1 in the SETUP-NETWORK menu to align the cursor with the TCP/IP or NET
MASK line to make Ethernet connection settings. Note that IP ADDRESS and NET MASK
are default set as IP ADDRESS 192.168.250.250 and NET MASK 255.255.255.0.
Change each setting only when necessary. After the setting is made, press ENTER to
confirm setting.

Connecting the MU on LAN


Use the twisted pair, Category 5 (UTP) cable (straight- through type) to connect the MU to
LAN. If connecting the MU to a PC directly, use the cross-connect type cable.

IMPORTANT
You should consult your network administrator before connecting the MU to the LAN.

147
19-4. Upgrading Operational Version

IMPORTANT
Consult your FOR-A supplier for upgrading your HVS-1000 series OU and MU.

You will need to use the FILE special menu function to download and apply the operational
software files on the CF card received with this upgrade explanation. The files listed below
contain the software upgrades for your HVS-1000 series OU and MU.

(HVS-1000HS main software) PM7837XX.MMU


(HVS-1000HS sub software) PM7758XX.SMU
(HVS-1000EOU software) PM7796XX.EOU

19-4-1. How to Verify Version


Open the STATUS-VERSION menu to verify current MU and OU versions following the
procedure below.

Press STATUS(SETUP) button in the menu select section to open the STATSU top
menu.
Turn F1 to select VERSION then press F1 or the DOWN button to open the STATUS
VERSION menu.

19-4-2. Upgrade Procedure


To upgrade your HVS-1000 series OU and MU, follow the procedure below:

Step Description
1 Save current setting data to the CF card.
2 Upgrade the MU software.
3 Upgrade the OU software.
4 Reboot the MU.
5 Initialize the MU.
6 Load the setting data saved at step 1.
7 Reboot the MU.
8 Turn power off then on at MU and OU.

IMPORTANT
Once upgrading the system, the setting data will be lost and return to factory default.
Important setting data should be backed up by saving to the CF card before upgrading
your system. Refer to section 17-2 “Saving Data to CF Cards" for backing up the data.

148
19-4-3. Saving Setting Data
Insert the CF card into the card drive.
Press the STILL(FILE) button with SHIFT lit in the menu select section to display the
FILE menu.
Turn F1 to select SAVE. Then press F1 or the DOWN button to display the FILE-SAVE
menu page.
In the FILE-SAVE menu, turn F2 to select the extension ALL for TYPE.
Press F4 to save all panel settings. A "beep" sound will be heard when the data is saved
as data.all to the CF card.

19-4-4. To Upgrade MU
Insert the CF card containing the OU and MU upgrade files into the card drive of your
control panel. Press the STILL(FILE) button with SHIFT lit in the menu select section to
display the FILE menu.
Press and hold down the STILL(FILE) button and turn F1 to select SEND. Then press F1
or the DOWN button to display the FILE -SEND menu.
Press and hold down the STILL(FILE) button and turn F2 to select the extension MMU.
MMU files are recognized by the MU as the MU upgrade files.

NOTE
Note to select the extension for upgrades in the FILE menu you must press and hold
FILE button in the menu select section and turn F1 button. Otherwise upgrade files
cannot be found.

Turn F3 to select the MMU file to be downloaded.


Press F4 to send (download) the selected upgrade file to the MU.

IMPORTANT
DO NOT turn power OFF at your units or try to remove the CF card from the card drive
until file download is complete!

A status bar will be shown on the menu screen to indicate the amount of processing
completed.
OU lamp buttons will go dark after 30 sec. (The data will start to be written to MU flash
ROM.)
After 1-2 min., panel indications will return to normal. (Download / ROM write complete.)
Software upgrade will be applied after rebooting MU. (MU power OFF then power ON)

IMPORTANT
You will have to upgrade your HVS-1000HS sub software by loading a upgrading file
with SMU extension in a same way as the HVS-1000HS main software upgrading
procedure. (Writing to MU flash ROM will take about 1 min.)

149
19-4-5. To Upgrade OU
Insert the CF card containing the OU and MU upgrade files into the card drive of your
control panel. Press the STILL(FILE) button with SHIFT lit in the menu select section to
display the FILE menu.
Press and hold down the STILL(FILE) button and turn F1 to select SEND. Then press F1
or the DOWN button to display the FILE -SEND menu.
Press and hold down the STILL(FILE) button and turn F2 to select the extension EOU.
EOU files are recognized by the OU as the OU upgrade files.
Turn F3 to select the EOU file to be downloaded.
Press F4 at the SEND parameter block to send (download) the selected upgrade file to
the OU.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT turn power OFF at your units or try to remove the CF card from the card drive
until file download is complete!

A status bar will be shown on the menu screen to indicate the amount of processing
completed.
"FLASH ERASE" will appear on the screen, indicating flash ROM data being erased.
"FLASH WRITING" will appear on the screen, indicating data is being written to OU flash
ROM.
Software upgrade is applied successfully when the start-up screen of the HVS-1000EOU
appears.

19-4-6. Loading Setting Data


All menu settings previously made for the MU and OU can be set again by loading the
"data.all" file from the CF card.
Insert the CF card where the data is saved into the card slot. Press the STILL(FILE)
button with SHIFT lit in the menu select section to display the FILE menu.
Press and hold down the STILL(FILE) button and turn F1 to select SEND. Then press F1
or the DOWN button to display the FILE -SEND menu.
In the FILE-SEND menu, turn F2 to select ALL for TYPE.
When there are multiple files in the FILE menu, turn the F3 to choose the file to be sent.
(The file name will be "data.all" if it has not been changed.)
Press F4 to load the data. Then a "beep" sound will be heard and the data is loaded from
the CF card.
A status bar will be shown on the menu screen to indicate the amount of processing
completed.
After about a half min. the data transmission will be finished.
Software upgrade will be applied after rebooting MU. (MU power OFF then power ON)

IMPORTANT
Once the saved system data is loading, you will have to restart both MU and OU.
(Each power off then power ON.) The Arcnet ID is applied only after the units are
restarted.

150
19-5. Changing Signal Format Data (DVE Ver.1)
The purpose of this chapter is to explain how to change the video signal format data in the DVE
card installed in the HVS-1000 series Main Unit. To change the format data, an appropriate file
for signal format data change is required and it has to be saved in the CF card.

19-5-1. Before starting


The HVS-1000 series system supports all popular HD and SD signal formats. It can work with
different signal formats by changing the setting under the SETUP menu and then restarting
the system. However, HVS-1000 series DVE cards can hold only two types of signal format
information in their internal memory. DVE effects are available only when the system is
operating in a DVE supported signal format. You can, however, use the DVE function on any
signal format used in the system by changing the signal format information in the DVE card.
Only one of the two signal formats will be rewritten by this data change.

IMPORTANT
To change the signal format data in the DVE card, the system should be started with
the video signal format that the DVE card is supporting at that moment. Otherwise, the
signal format cannot be changed in the DVE card.
The following procedure does not erase the currently used format data, but erases the
other, unused format data, and rewrites data for the new format.

19-5-2. Checking the signal format data


Before changing the format data, use the procedure below to check the signal formats that
the DVE supports.
Press and hold down the FILE button. Once the FILE menu is displayed on the menu
screen, turn the control F2 while holding down the FILE button to select the file extension
FPD. Release the FILE button.
Press the control F1 to select the OPERATE line. In the OPERATE line turn the control
F2 (or the F3). Each DVE status will pop up on the screen as shown below. To close the
pop-up window, press the same control again.

DVE1 STATUS
[ 1080/60i, 59.94i ]
1080/23.9p,sF,24p,sF

The video signal format shown in [ ] is the currently used format. The video signal format
not shown in [ ] is not currently used.
In the example above, the system uses the HDTV format, 1080/60i or 1080/59.94i. The
currently unused format data, 1080/23.9p, 23.98sF, 24p and 24sF will be cleared and
changed to new format data.

151
19-5-3. Changing the format data
Press and hold down the FILE button. Once the FILE menu is displayed on the menu
screen, turn the control F2 while holding down the FILE button to select the file extension
FPD. Release the FILE button.

Turn the F1 control to select the SEND line. And then turn the F3 control to select a
desired signal format data file under the SELECT item. The format data change file will be
given a name in the following table according to video signal formats.

The SEND parameter line in the FILE menu.

FILE

SEND TYPE FPD SELECT 1 SEND DVE1

60I -01. FPD


| | |
Video format Software version File extension for format data change file

(File name) (Corresponding video signal format data)


60I___-01.FPD 1080/59.94i, 1080/60i
50I___-01.FPD 1080/50i
24P__-01.FPD 1080/23.98p, 1080/23.98sF, 1080/24p, 1080/24sF
720P_-01.FPD 720/59.94p, 720/60p
SD___-01.FPD NTSC/PAL

Turn the F4 control to select a DVE card to be changed under the SEND item. Normally
select DVE1/2 if two DVE cards configured or select DVE1 if only one DVE card
configured.
Press the control F4. Data transmission to MU will be started.
The transmission status will be indicated in the pop-up window.

STATUS
DVE1:Error. [6]
DVE2: Erasing Flash.

Do not turn the power off or pull the card out while processing.

Message List
Message Status
Clearing Flash. Clearing Flash data
Writing to Flash. Writing data
Convert completed. Completed properly

152
Error Messages
Message Status
Error. [5] Error occurred (DVE timed out)
Error. [6] Error occurred (DVE format data clearing error)
Error. [7] Error occurred (DVE format data writing error)
Error. [8] Error occurred (Transmission SUM error)
Error. [9] Error occurred (Writing SUM error)
No DVE card. No DVE card is installed.
Signal format err. The system is running with a signal format that the
DVE card does not support.
MU-OU trans err. MU-OU transmission error (MU Busy, SEQ ERR)

Once the data change is finished, “Completed” is displayed on the screen. This process
takes from three to five minutes to complete.

If an error is displayed, check the following points and repeat the procedure from step 3).
Is the system operating with a signal format that DVE card supports?
Is the DVE card selected correctly?

After changing the data, the regular operation can be started immediately. To use the new
format, select the signal format under the SETUP-SYSTEM menu, and then restart the
system.

153
19-6. Upgrading DVE Card (DVE Ver.2)
The purpose of this chapter is to explain how to upgrade the DVE card (DVE-1000HS/HSA)
installed in the HVS-1000. Hanabi series DVE cards hold five upgradable firmware files; two
applied to hardware and three applied to software. By upgrading these firmware files, you can
add new features / facilities to your existing DVE card. New firmware files can also be provided
to improve or change existing operation or features of your DVE card.

IMPORTANT
Consult your FOR-A suppliers for details about upgrading DVE card. Do not turn the
power off or pull the card out during upgrade process. Unless it may damage your
DVE card.

19-6-1. Checking the DVE Card Version


Before upgrading your DVE card, use the procedure below to check the current version of
your DVE Card.

Press the SHIFT button in the menu select section to light on. And then press the
STILL(FILE) button to display the FILE top menu.
Turn the control F1 while holding down the FILE button to select SEND and press the
DOWN button or control F1 to go to the FILE-SEND menu.
Turn the control F2 while holding down the FILE button to select the file extension “G*”.
Release the FILE button.
Press the control F1 to select the OPERATE line.
In the OPERATE line turn the control F2 (or the F3). Each DVE status will pop up on the
screen as shown below. To close the pop-up window, press the same control again.

DVE1 STATUS
CPU:2.02.00 DSP:000
HARD1:000 2:100 3:000

CPU: CPU Version


DSP: DSP Version
HARD1~3: Hardware Version

154
19-6-2. Upgrading the DVE Card
Press the SHIFT button in the menu select section to light on. And then press the
STILL(FILE) button to display the FILE top menu. Turn the control F1 while holding down
the FILE button to select SEND and press the DOWN button or control F1 to go to the
FILE-SEND menu.
Turn the control F2 while holding down the FILE button to select the file extension “G*”.
Release the FILE button.

The SEND parameter line in the FILE menu.

FILE

SEND TYPE G* SELECT 1 SEND DVE1

Turn the control F3 to select a firmware upgrade file under the SELECT item. The Types
in the name of the firmware file including file extension are as in the table below.

File Name Firmware File Type


PM******.GCP CPU firmware
PM******.GDS DSP firmware
PM******.GF1 Firmware for hardware1
PM******.GF2 Firmware for hardware2
PM******.GF3 Firmware for hardware3

You can upgrade only one firmware at a time. Repeat this procedure until all necessary
upgrading of files is completed.
Turn the control F4 to select a DVE card to be changed under the SEND item. Normally
select DVE1/2 if two DVE cards configured or select DVE1 if only one DVE card
configured.
Press the control F4. Data transmission to MU will be started.
The transmission status will be indicated in the pop-up window.

STATUS
DVE1: Writing Flash.
DVE2: Clearing Flash.

IMPORTANT
Do not turn the power off or pull the card out until " Reboot MU." is displayed on the
screen.

155
Message List
Message Status
Clearing Flash. Clearing Flash data
Writing to Flash. Writing data
Writing to CPU Writing to CPU
Check Checking sum
Completed.
Upgrade finished successfully
Reboot MU

Once the firmware upgrade is finished successfully, “Completed.” is displayed on the


screen as shown below. This process takes from three to five minutes to complete.

Reboot MU
DVE1: Completed
DVE2: Completed

If any error messages in the table below are displayed, check the following points and
repeat the procedure from step 3. Select only the failed card in the next upgrade process,
if an error appears on either one of two cards.

Is the upgrade file selected correctly?


Is the DVE card selected correctly?

Error Message Status


Err. [5] Error occurred (DVE timed out)
Err. [6] Error occurred (DVE format data clearing error)
Err. [7] Error occurred (DVE format data writing error)
Err. [8] Error occurred (Transmission SUM error)
Err. [9] Error occurred (Writing SUM error)
No DVE card. No DVE card is installed.
MU-OU trans err. MU-OU transmission error (MU Busy, SEQ ERR)

Reboot the MU.


Repeat this procedure from step1 to step 7 until all necessary upgrading of files is
completed.
After upgrading is finished, verify that the new version number of the DVE card appears
on the menu. (See section 19-6-1 "Checking the DVE Card Version.")

156
20. Specifications and Dimensions
20-1. System Specifications
20-1-1. HVS-1000HS (HD mode)
TV Standard 1080/60i,1080/59.94i, 1080/50i, 1080/23.98sF, 1080/24sF,
1080/23.98p, 1080/24p, 720/59.94p, 720/60p
Signal Processing Digital component 4:2:2 4 (key)
Quantization 10-bit
Sampling Frequency Y: 74.25/1.001MHz or 74.25MHz
C: 37.125/1.001MHz or 37.125MHz
Key: 74.25/1.001MHz or 74.25MHz
Video Inputs HD SDI 1.485/1.001Gpbs or 1.485Gbps, 75Ω, 4 inputs (optionally
expand to 16 primary and UTL-IN inputs), BNC
Reference Input TRI-sync: ±0.3V with loopthrough, 75Ω, 1 input, BNC or
BB: 0.429 (0.45) Vp-p, 75Ω or loopthrough, 1 input, BNC
Video Outputs HD SDI 1.485/1.001Gpbs or 1.485Gbps, 75Ω, 5 outputs (2 ea. for
PGM and 1 ea. for PREV, AUX1 and INPUT PREV plus 3 AUX
possible), BNC
Reference Output TRI-sync, ±0.3V or BB, 0.429 (0.45) Vp-p, 75Ω, 2 ea., BNC
S/N Ratio Better than 58dB
I/O Delay 1H + 1 frame (with KEY1 and KEY2) +1 frame (when DVE applied
to output)
Interfaces
OU: 15-pin D-sub connector (female), 1 port
RS-422: 9-pin D-sub connector (female), 1 port
GPI IN: 15-pin D-sub connector (female), 1 port
GPI/TALLY OUT: 25-pin D-sub connector (female), 1 port
EDITOR 9-pin D-sub connector (female), 1 port
ALARM: 9-pin D-sub connector (female), 1 port
ARCNET (option):: Token passing, 10Mbps, 75Ω or loopthrough, BNC, 1 port
ETHERNET (option): 10/100BASE-TX, RJ-45; 1 port
Temperature 0°C - 40°C
Humidity 30% - 90% (no condensation)
Power 100VAC-240VAC±10%, 50/60Hz
Power Consumption Standard: 165VA(100V), 265VA(240V)
Full option: 170VA(100V), 275VA(240V)
Weight Approx. 15kg (18kg: full option installed)
Dimensions 424 (W) x 500 (D) x 88 (H) mm, EIA 2RU

157
20-1-2. HVS-1000HS (SD mode)
TV Standard 525/60, 625/50
Signal Processing Digital component 4:2:2 4 (key) 10 bit
Quantization 10-bit
Sampling Frequency Y: 74.25/1.001MHzor 74.25MHz
C: 37.125/1.001MHz or 37.125MHz
Key: 74.25/1.001MHz or 74.25MHz
Video Inputs SD SDI 270Mpbs, 75Ω, 4 inputs (optionally expand to 16 primary
and UTL-IN inputs), BNC
Reference Input BB: 0.429 (0.45) Vp-p, 75Ω or loopthrough, 1 input, BNC
Video Outputs SD SDI 270Mpbs,, 75Ω, 5 outputs (2 ea. for PGM and 1 ea. for
PREV, AUX1 and INPUT PREV plus 3 AUX possible), BNC
Reference Output BB, 0.429 (0.45) Vp-p, 75Ω, 2 ea., BNC
S/N Ratio Better than 58dB
I/O Delay 1H + 1 frame (with KEY1 and KEY2) +1 frame (when DVE applied
to output)
Interfaces
OU: 15-pin D-sub connector (female), 1 port
RS-422: 9-pin D-sub connector (female), 1 port
GPI IN: 15-pin D-sub connector (female), 1 port
GPI/TALLY OUT: 25-pin D-sub connector (female), 1 port
EDITOR 9-pin D-sub connector (female), 1 port
ALARM: 9-pin D-sub connector (female), 1 port
ARCNET (option): Token passing, 10Mbps, 75Ω or loopthrough, BNC, 1 port
ETHERNET (option): 10/100BASE-TX, RJ-45; 1 port
Temperature 0°C - 40°C
Humidity 30% - 90% (no condensation)
Power 100VAC-240VAC±10%, 50/60Hz
Power Consumption Standard: 130VA(100V), 200VA(240V)
Full option: 140VA(100V), 210VA(240V)
Weight Approx. 15kg (18kg: Full option installed)
Dimensions 424 (W) x 500 (D) x 88 (H) mm, EIA 2RU

158
20-1-3. HVS-1000EOU
Card Drive Accepts Compact Flash memory card.
Interfaces
TO MU 15-pin D-sub connector (female), 1 port
ARCNET (option): Token passing, 10Mbps, 75Ω or loopthrough, BNC, 1 port
Temperature 0°C - 40°C
Humidity 30% - 90% (no condensation)
Power 100VAC-240VAC±10%, 50/60Hz
Power Consumption 46VA(100V), 64VA(240V)
Weight Approx. 6.5kg (7.0kg: full option installed)
Dimensions 430 (W) x 310 (D) x 161 (H) mm

159
20-2. External Dimensions
20-2-1. HVS-1000HS
(All dimensions in mm.)

INPUT

4 3 2 1

O UTPUT
2

INPUT PREV AU X 1 PREV PG M 2 PGM 1

GL

2 1
1 REF OU T BB IN TRI SY NC IN ALARM RS-4 22
A C 100-24 0V ~ 5 0/60H z IN CPU

RATING LABEL
GPI/TALLY OUT GPI IN OU EDITO R
23

13
60

503
400

30
55
43

16 56 16
6

PO W ER 1 DC HVS-1000HS
ON DIGITAL VIDEO SWITCHER
FAN

OFF
88
76

PO W ER 2 DC
ON FAN

OFF

HANABI
6
12

ø20

65 300 65

430
462

480

160
20-2-2. HVS-1000EOU
(All dimensions in mm.)

AC100-240V ~50/60Hz IN A C100-240V ~50/60H z IN

RATING LABEL

TO M U SER V IC E I/ O A RC N ET

OFF OF F

ON ON

POWER 1 P OWER 2

16 1

RESET

69.9 92.7

3 0°
430 12

HVS-1000
DIGITAL VIDEO SWITCHER

5. 5
SEQ EVENT DVECH DIRECTPATT

STATUS TRANS WIPE MATT


(SET UP) (PAT TER N S EL) (BOR DER ) 7 8 9 STORE

STILL KEY1 KEY2 DSK


(FILE) (MAS K1) (MAS K2) (MASK) 4 5 6 RECALL

EDITOR EDGE1 EDGE2 OPTSEL


(SH ADOW 1) (SH AD OW 2) 1 2 3 +/-

USER DVE WARP CROP SHIFT


(SE Q) (FR EEZE) (BORDER) (TR AIL ) 0 CLEAR ENTER
(CANCEL) (PAUSE) (PL AY)

X Y Z

ON/OFF SUB EFF SHADOW SHIFT


(MOS AIC ) (HIL ITE)

ACCESS MEMORYCARD DVEPOS WIPE POS DEF

DVE ROT AUTO CK MENU


310

USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
HANABI
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
USER MEMORY USER MEMORY

BKGD KEY1 KEY2 DSK BLACK


BUS
SELECT
KEY1 KEY2 DSK EFFECTBG AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 INPUTPREV PGM PREV CLEAN DVE KEY UTILITYIN NOR NOR/REV REV FADER LMT SEQ LINK

MIX MIX MIX TRANSIT ION RATE


W IPE W IPE W IPE
DVE DVE DVE
KEY/ KEY1
AUX
BLACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MATT DVE SHIFT FAM
OVER BLACK
NAM ON ON TRANS

BKGD KEY1 KEY2


MIX

NEXT TRANSITION
BLACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MATT DVE SHIFT
W IPE DVE CUT
MIX (FAM) (NAM)

TRANSITION TYPE

CUT DSK
BLACK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MATT DVE SHIFT AUTO
TRANS TRANS

12 (50.1)

161
Appendix 1. Menu List
1-1. STATUS menu
■STATUS top menu STATUS (SETUP) button
Sub menu
(Turn F1 to move between.) Description
MU/OU ALARM Displays alarm information
BUTTON XPT Displays signal assignment information for M/E bus.
AUX/KEY XPT Displays signal assignment information for AUX output and keys.
VERSION Displays software information.
DVE STATUS Displays DVE card information.

Sub menu Parameter line Parameter Description


PS1 Displays alarm information for the MU standard power supply.
PS2 Displays alarm information for the MU redundant power supply.
FR1 Displays fan alarm information for MU standard power supply.
FR2 Displays fan alarm information for MU redundant power supply.
MU ALARM BTRY Displays alarm information for battery.
MU/OU Displays fan alarm information for the front right (the observer’s
FANLT
ALARM left) cooling.
Displays fan alarm information for the front left (the observer’s
FANRT right) cooling fan.
FANRA Displays alarm information for the rear-cooling fan.
PS1 Displays alarm information for the OU standard power supply.
OU ALARM
PS2 Displays alarm information for the OU redundant power supply.
LED DISP Turns the alarm indication ON/OFF.
BK Displays signal assignment of the M/E BLAK button.
BUTTON 1-8 Displays signal assignment of the M/E bus buttons 1-8.
MT Displays signal assignment of the M/E MATT button.
BUTTON Displays signal assignment of the M/E BLAK button with SHIFT
BK
XPT pressed.
SHIFT + Displays signal assignment of the M/E bus buttons 9-16 with
BUTTON 1-8 SHIFT pressed.
Displays signal assignment of the M/E MATT button with SHIFT
MT pressed.
EFCT BKGD Displays signal assignments of the DVE effect background.
AUX AUX1-4 Displays signal assignments of the AUX 1-4.
INPUT
PREV Displays signal assignments of the INPUT PREV.

AUX/KEY KEY1-SRC Displays signal assignments of the KEY1 SOURCE.


XPT KEY1-INS Displays signal assignments of the KEY1 INSERT.
KEY2-SRC Displays signal assignments of the KEY2 SOURCE.
KEYER
KEY2-INS Displays signal assignments of the KEY2 INSERT.
DSK-SRC Displays signal assignments of the DSK SOURCE.
DSK-INS Displays signal assignments of the DSK INSERT.
MU SOFT Displays the MU main software version.
SUB CPU Displays the MU sub software version.
VERSION
OU SOFT Displays the OU software version.
DVE Displays the DVE software version.
DVE CARD1 STATUS Displays the standard DVE card information.
DVE DVE CARD2 STATUS Displays the optional DVE card information.
STATUS LED DISP ALARM Turns the DVE alarm indication ON/OFF.
LED DISP DVE STS Turns the DVE format error indication ON/OFF.

1
1-2. SETUP menu
■SETUP top menu SHIFT + STATUS(SETUP) button
Sub menu (Turn F1 to Description
move between.)
SYSTEM Sets the system signal format and adjusts input and output reference signals.
INPUT Sets input signal names.
OUTPUT Sets the safety area of output signals.
DVE SETUP PRESET PATTERN CROP and other DVE related settings
MU MODE KEYER MODE, MATT CLIP and other settings.
OU MODE Sets OU usability settings including OU INIT.
BUTTON XPT Sets crosspoints bus assignments.
BUS CTRL Sets bus inhibit, AUX output ON/OFF and other settings.
FREE ASSIGN Sets menu / function assignment to the user buttons.
GPI/TALLY Sets GPI input / output and tally assignments.
RS-422 RS-422 baud rate and parity settings.
NETWORK Arcnet and Ethernet settings (option).
DATE/TIME Sets date and time.

SETUP-SYSTEM menu
Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
FORMAT MODE RATE ASPECT REBOOT
REF IN OUT
SC PHASE COARSE FINE
SYSTEM
H PHASE H PHASE
OUT PHASE H PHASE V PHASE
INIT INIT
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
HD 1080 1080, 720
MODE
SD NTSC NTSC, PAL
60i, 59.94i, 50i, 24p, 23.98p, 24sF,
1080 59.94i 23.98sF
RATE HD
3-3
720 59.94p 60p, 59.94p
1080, 720 16:9 4:3, 16:9
ASPECT NTSC 4:3 4:3, SQUEEZ, LETTER
PAL 4:3 4:3, SQUEEZ
REBOOT (Press and hold down F5 at least 1 sec. to reboot system.)
1080/59.94i,
1080/50i, BB BB, TRI S
720/59.94p
1080/60i,
HD 1080/24sF, 18-2-1
IN
1080/23.98sF, TRI S TRI S
1080/24p,
1080/23.98p,
720/60p
SD BB BB

2
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
1080/59.94i,
1080/50i, BB BB, TRI S, SETUP
720/59.94p
1080/60i,
HD 1080/24sF,
OUT 1080/23.98sF, TRI S TRI S
1080/24p,
1080/23.98p,
720/60p
NTSC BB BB, SETUP
SD
PAL BB BB
COARSE BB 0 0 -170 to 170
FINE BB 0.0 0.0 -15.0 to 15.0
TRI S 0 18-2-1
1080/50i -19 to 19
H PHASE 1080/59.94i, 0
720/59.94p -15 to 15
BB
NTSC -15 to 15
PAL -19 to 19
1080/60i, 1080/59.94i -1094 to 1094
1080/50i -1314 to 1314
1080/24p, 1080/23.98p,
-1369 to 1369
H PHASE 1080/24sF, 1080/23.98sF 0
720/59.94p, 720/60p -819 to 819
NTSC -852 to 852
PAL -858 to 858
V PHASE 0 -100 to 100
(Turn F2 to select value 18-5-1
INIT and press and hold down CUR CUR, SYS, ALL
F2 to initialize all or the
selected parameters.)

SETUP-INPUT menu
Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
BLACK CHARA1 CHARA2 CHARA3 CHARA4
IN01 - IN16 CHARA1 CHARA2 CHARA3 CHARA4
STILL1 - 4 CHARA1 CHARA2 CHARA3 CHARA4
INPUT MATT1 -2 CHARA1 CHARA2 CHARA3 CHARA4
WHITE CHARA1 CHARA2 CHARA3 CHARA4
UTILITY IN CHARA1 CHARA2 CHARA3 CHARA4
COLBAR CHARA1 CHARA2 CHARA3 CHARA4
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference:
CHARA1
CHARA2 BLAK, IN01-IN16, STL1-STL4
Alphanumeric and symbols 5-3-1
CHARA3 MAT1, MAT2, WHIT, UTL, CB
CHARA4

3
SETUP-OUTPUT menu
Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
OUT CLEAN DVE KEY
SAFETY PGM ENABLE TYPE CROSS
SAFETY PRV ENABLE TYPE CROSS
SAFETY AUX1 ENABLE TYPE CROSS
SAFETY AUX2 ENABLE TYPE CROSS
SAFETY AUX3 ENABLE TYPE CROSS
SAFETY AUX4 ENABLE TYPE CROSS
OUTPUT SIDE PGM ENABLE TYPE TRANSP
SIDE PREV ENABLE TYPE TRANSP
SIDE AUX1 ENABLE TYPE TRANSP
SIDE AUX2 ENABLE TYPE TRANSP
SIDE AUX3 ENABLE TYPE TRANSP
SIDE AUX4 ENABLE TYPE TRANSP
ANCI BUS SEL PGM SEL PREV SEL XPT LV
ANCI OUT EN AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
CLEAN OFF OFF, ON
PGM, PST, ME A, ME B, KEY1, KEY2,
DVE KEY PGM D KEY1, D KEY2, D KEY3, D KEY4, 6-1-2
ME KEY

ENABLE OFF ON, OFF

OFF, 90K, 85K, 80K, 90B, 85B, 80B,


TYPE OFF 85B+80K, 90B+85K, 90B+80K, 85B+80B,
90B+85B, 90B+80B
CROSS OFF ON, OFF 18-2-2

ENABLE HD OFF ON, OFF

TYPE HD LINE LINE, TRANSP


TYPE=
TRANSP 50 0-100
TRANSP
PGM SEL OFF OFF, AUX1-AUX4, EFF BG
PREV SEL OFF OFF, AUX1-AUX4, EFF BG
18-2-4
XPT LV 0 0~100
AUX1 - AUX4 OFF ON, OFF

SETUP-DVE SETUP menu


Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
P PAT CROP T+B R+L ALL SET
DVE SET
DVE MODE KF DIR EDGE ROT STEP FILTER
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
T+B 0 0 to 100.0
R+L 0 0 to 100.0
9-4-4
ALL 0 0 to 100.0
SET ---
KF DIR NORMAL NORMAL, REVERS
7-3-4
TRANS EDGE OFF OFF, ON
ROT STEP 1000 360, 1000, 4000 9-4-1
FILTER MODE1 MODE1, MODE2 7-3-4

4
SETUP-MU MODE menu
Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
TRANS CTRL MODE
AUTO AUTO
MU MODE KEYER LINK GAIN SET
MATT CLIP T CLIP ADJ1 ADJ2
MATT CLIP B ADJ1 ADJ2
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
MODE REG REG, ABU 7-4-2
AUTO PAUSE PAUSE, CUT, RETURN 7-4-4
LINK ON OFF, ON 11-2
GAIN TYPE1 TYPE1, TYPE2
SET INPUT INPUT, KEYER
ADJ1 0 -20 to 20
ADJ2 0 0 to 50 18-2-3
CLIP ON ON, OFF
ADJ1 0 -20 to 20
ADJ2 0 0 to 50

SETUP-OU MODE menu


Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
OU CTRL MODE RATE MENU SHIFT BUS SHIFT
JOYSTICK SPEED
FADER GAIN OFFSET
OU MODE BUZZER TYPE VOLUME TONE
SCR SAVER SELECT TYPE MIN
BACK
LCD CONTROL BRIGHT CNTR-VH CNTR-VL LIGHT
UTILITY BUZZER BRIGHT OU INIT
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
MODE 1 1,2 18-1-9
RATE FRM FRM, SEC 7-4-3
MENU SHIFT TOGGLE TOGGLE, PUSH 18-1-4
BUS SHIFT NORMAL NORMAL, TOGGLE, OFF 5-3-2
SPEED NOR LOW, NOR, HIGH 18-1-6
GAIN 1.00 0.90 to 1.10
18-1-2
OFFSET 1.00 0.00 to 2.00
TYPE ON TYPE1, TYPE2, TYPE3, TYPE4, OFF
VOLUME 31 0-31 18-1-5
TONE NORMAL LOW, NORMAL, HIGH
SELECT ON OFF, ON
TYPE TIME TIME, BALL 18-1-7
MIN 5 1-60
BRIGHT 6 0-31 18-1-1
CNTR-VH 20 0-31
18-1-3
CNTR-VL 21 0-31
BACKLIG 16 0-31 18-1-1
BRIGHT 10 1-15 18-1-1
OU INIT OFF OFF, ON 18-5-2

5
SETUP-BUTTON XPT menu
Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
BLACK SINGAL NAME INHIBIT
BUTTON01 - 08 SINGAL NAME INHIBIT
MATT SINGAL NAME INHIBIT
BUTTON XPT
SHIFT + BLACK SINGAL NAME INHIBIT
SHIFT + BTN01 - 08 SINGAL NAME INHIBIT
SHIFT + MATT SINGAL NAME INHIBIT
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
SIGNAL BLACK, 01-16, MATT1-2, STIL1-4, WHITE, UTL IN
NAME (Displays name set at the SETUP-INPUT menu according to SIGNAL setting.) 5-3-3
INHIBIT OFF OFF, ON

SETUP-BUS CTRL menu


Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
BUS INHIBIT SELECT
AUX ENABLE AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4
BUS CTRL INPUT PREV SELECT
UTILITY IN SELECT
BUS TYPE SELECT
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
SELECT OFF OFF, ON
AUX1 ON ON, OFF
AUX2 ON ON, OFF
AUX3 ON ON, OFF 6-1-2
AUX4 ON ON, OFF
SELECT ON ON, OFF
SELECT INPUT CAMRTN, INPUT
SELECT P/P P/P, A/B 5-1-2

SETUP-FREE ASSIGN menu


Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
FREE ASSIGN USER BTN 1-8 TYPE NAME
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
TYPE MENU MENU, FUNC
4-3-3
NAME --- ---

SETUP - GPI menu


Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
TALLY COLOR Sets tally output color. 19-1-3
GPI IN Sets GPI input pin assignments. 19-1-1
GPI/TALLY OUT Sets GPI and TALLY output pin assignments. 19-1-2
TALLY1-5 Sets tally1 to tally5 output pin assignments. 19-1-3

6
SETUP-RS422 menu
Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
RS-422 RS-422(1) BAUD PARITY FUNC
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
BAUD 38400 9600, 19200, 38400
PARITY EVEN NONE, ODD, EVEN 19-3-1
FUNC TALLY TALLY

SETUP-NETWORK menu
Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
TCP IP **** **** **** ****
NET MASK **** **** **** ****
NETWORK
ARC OU ID OU CTRL
ARC MU ID CTRL MU MU
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
OU 1 1 - 255
CTRL D-SUB D-SUB, ARCNET
19-3-2
CTRL MU 250 1 - 255
MU 250 1 - 255

SETUP-DATE/TIME menu
Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
DATE YEAR MONTH DAY
DATE
TIME HOUR MIN SEC APPLY
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
YEAR Current time 2000 - 2099
MONTH 1 - 12
DAY 1 - 31
HOUR Current date 0 - 23 18-1-8
MIN 0 - 59
SEC 0 - 59
APPLY ---

7
1-3. COLOR CORRECTION menu
■COLOR CORRECTION menu OPT SEL button
Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
between.)
INIT INIT
CONTROL CHAN TYPE SELECT ENABLE
PROC CTRL1 Y LEVEL C LEVEL C PHASE
PROC CTRL2 VIDEO LV BLACK LV
CC MODE SELECT G CURVE SEPIA SAT SEPIA HUE
GAMMA LEVEL R G B ALL
WHITE LEVEL R G B ALL
BLACK LEVEL R G B ALL
CLIP TYPE ENABLE
YPbPr CLIP Y LEVEL C LEVEL BLACK LV
RGB CLIP WHITE BLACK
Sub menu Default Setting range Refer to
INIT OFF OFF, PROC, CC_LV, CLIP, ALL
CHAN CH1 CH1, CH2, KEY1, KEY2
TYPE INPUT BUS, INPUT, BUTTON
PGM(A_BUS), PST(B_BUS), EFF_BG, DSK,
TYPE=BUS PGM (A_BUS) AUX1~4 13-4
SELECT TYPE=INPUT IN01 IN01~16, UTL IN, STIL1~4
BUTTON1~BUTTON16, BLACK, WHITE,
TYPE=BUTTON BUTTON1 MATT1, MATT2
ENABLE OFF OFF, ON
Y LEVEL 100% 0% ~ 200%
C LEVEL 100% 0% ~ 200%
C PHASE 0% -179 ~ 180 13-5
VIDEO LV 0% 0% ~ 200%
BLACK LV 0% -150~150
SELECT BAL BAL, DIF, SEPIA
G CURVE CENTER CENTER, BLACK, WHITE
CC MODE = SEPIA SAT 25 0 ~ 100
SEPIA SEPIA HUE -160 -179 ~ 180
R 100% 0% ~ 200 %
G 100% 0% ~ 200 %
B 100% 0% ~ 200 %
GRP_ADJ 100% 0% ~ 200 %
13-6
R 100% 0% ~ 200 %
CC MODE = G 100% 0% ~ 200 %
BAL or DIF B 100% 0% ~ 200 %
GRP_ADJ 100% 0% ~ 200 %
R 100% 0% ~ 200 %
G 100% 0% ~ 200 %
B 100% 0% ~ 200 %
GRP_ADJ 100% 0% ~ 200 %
TYPE YPbPr YPbPr, RGB
ENABLE OFF OFF, ON
Y LEVEL 109% 50% ~ 109%
TYPE = 13-7
YPbPr C LEVEL 111% 50% ~ 111%
BLACK LV -7% -7% ~ 50%
WHITE 300% 50% ~ 300%
TYPE = RGB
BLACK -200% -200% ~ 50%

8
1-4. EDITOR menu
■EDITOR menu EDITOR button
Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
SETUP TYPE DELAY ENABLE SELECT
RS-422 WIPE BAUD PARITY
SETUP2 XPT CTR PATT SEL KEYER
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
TYPE GVG100 GVG100, BVS3K
DELAY ON ON, OFF
ENABLE OFF ON, OFF
SELECT BVS3K ME ME, PVW, ALL, ME ON, PVW ON
GVG100 NORMAL NORMAL, LIST
WIPE 19-2
BVS3K NORMAL NORMAL
BAUD 38400 9600, 19200, 38400
PARITY ODD NONE, ODD, EVEN
XPT CTRL INPUT INPUT, BUTTON
PATT SEL ON ON, OFF
KEYER ON ON, OFF

1-5. MATT menu


■MATT COLOR menu MATT button
Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
BUS MATT1 SAT LUM HUE COLOR
BUS MATT2 SAT LUM HUE COLOR
BKGD MATT SAT LUM HUE COLOR
KEY1 MATT SAT LUM HUE COLOR
KEY2 MATT SAT LUM HUE COLOR
KEY1 EDGE SAT LUM HUE COLOR
KEY1 SHADOW SAT LUM HUE COLOR
KEY2 EDGE SAT LUM HUE COLOR
KEY2 SHADOW SAT LUM HUE COLOR
DSK MATT SAT LUM HUE COLOR
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
SAT 66.2 0.0 to 100.0
HD 5.4
LUM 0.0 to 100.0
SD 8.5 5-2
HUE HD 3.5 0.0 to 359.5
COLOR SELECT SELECT, ENTRY

9
1-6. STILL menu
■STILL menu STILL(FILE) button
Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
STORE STILL1 STILL2 STILL3 STILL4
SIGNAL SIGNAL DVE STILL
STILL TYPE STILL1 STILL2 STILL3 STILL4
ANIME1 SELECT FRAME SPEED
ANIME2 POS X POS Y
MOTION BLUR SELECT
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
STILL1
STILL2
(Selects signal when any of XAUX1 to XAUX4 is selected for SIGNAL.) 14
STILL3
STILL4
PGM, PREV, CLN, AUX1 to AUX4,
SIGNAL PGM MATT1, MATT2, XAUX1 to XAUX4, DVE 14-1
KEY
DVE STILL 10-3-3
STILL1
FRAME, ODD, EVEN, ANIME
STILL2 (Only FRAME and ANIME are available, if
FRAME 14-1
STILL3 progressive or segment frame signal
format is selected.)
STILL4
SELECT STIL4 STIL1 to STIL4
FRAME 36 1 to 36
SPEED 1 1 to 32
1080i 0 to 1600
720p 0 to 1068
POS-X 0
NTSC 0 to 600 10-2-2
PAL 0 to 600
1080i 0 to 450
720p 0 to 300
POS-Y 0
NTSC 0 to 202
PAL 0 to 239
SELECT OFF OFF, STIL1 to STIL4 10-2-1

10
1-7. FILE menu
FILE menu SHIFT + STILL(FILE) button
Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
SEND Loads data to the MU/OU from CF card.
SAVE Saves data to CF card.

FILE-SEND menu
Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
SEND SEND TYPE SELECT SEND
OPERATE DELETE RENAME CHAR
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
ALL, MMU, SMU, EOU, SYS, MEM
TYPE ALL JP*, TG*, FPD, G*, U*, P*
SELECT (Selects file)
17-3
SEND Image files STL1 to STL4, STL1 C~STL4 C, STL1 T~STL4 T, STL1 L~STL4 L
SEND User U01 to U50
Pattern
DELETE OFF ON, OFF 17-4
RENAME 0 0 to 7
17-5
CHAR --- Alphanumeric Characters

FILE-SAVE menu
Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
SAVE FILE SAVE TYPE SELECT SAVE
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
TYPE ALL ALL, SYS, MEM, JP*, TG*, U*, P*
SELECT (Selects file) 17-2
SAVE --- ---

11
1-8. TRANSITION menu
■TRANS menu TRANS(PATT SEL) button
Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
TRANS RATE1 BKGD KEY1 KEY2
TEANS RATE2 DSK BLACK
FADER LIMIT BKGD KEY1 KEY2 DSK
PREV SEL DSK
EFFECT BG SELECT
BKGD MATT SAT LUM HUE COLOR
PATTERN SEL WIPE BKGD KEY1 KEY2
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
BKGD

KEY1
(option) 1080 30 or 25 or 24

KEY2 0 to 999 7-4-3


(option)
DSK 720 60
NTSC 30
BLACK
PAL 25
BKGD 100.0 0 to 100.0
KEY1 (option) 100.0 0 to 100.0
7-4-1
KEY2 (option) 100.0 0 to 100.0
DSK 100.0 0 to 100.0
DSK OFF OFF, ON
SELECT MATT MATT, EFF BG
SAT 66.2 0 to 100.0
HD 5.4
LUM 0 to 100.0
SD 8.5 5-2
HD 3.5
HUE 0 to 359.5
SD 7.5
COLOR SELECT SELECT, ENTRY
SHIFT+TRANS(PATTERN SEL) button
WIPE --- 0 to 99
BKGD ---
100 to 219 (Including options) 7-5
KEY1 --- 401 to 450 (user patterns)
KEY2 ---

12
1-9. WIPE MODIFY menu
First select WIPE pattern in the transition section and then press WIPE MODIFY button to open the WIPE MODIFY
menu specific to the selected pattern.

■WIPE MODIFY menu WIPE(BORDER) button


Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
WIPE MODI SELECT MULTI-X MULTI-Y INIT
EFFECT TYPE LEVEL INVERT
SEPIA COLOR SAT HUE
WIPE POS POS X POS Y ANGLE ASPECT
BORDER SELECT SIGNAL WIDTH
BRDR-COLOR SAT LUM HUE COLOR
EDGE-TYPE TYPE MODE SOFT
EDGE-MODE AMP FREQ POS
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
SELECT 0 0-99
INIT OFF OFF, POS, EDGE, BORDER, ALL
OFF, MOSAIC, MONO, PAINT, NEGA,
TYPE OFF SEPIA
MOSAIC,
LEVEL 0 0~16
PAINT
SAT 22.6 0.0 ~ 100.0
SEPIA
HUE 214.5 0.0 ~ 359.5
INVERT OFF OFF, ON
1080 -1500 to 1500
POS X 720 0 -1000 to 1000 7-6
SD -640 to 640
1080 -1100 to 1100
720 -720 to 720
POS Y 0
NTSC -500 to 500
PAL -600 to 600
ANGLE 0.0 0.0 to 359.5
X 1 1 to 64
Y 1 1 to 64
-3000 ~ 3000 (WIPE Ver7.0 or higher)
ASPECT 0.0 -100.0 to 100.0
SHIFT+WIPE(BORDER) button
SELECT OFF OFF, ON
SIGNAL MATT MATT, EFF BG
WIDTH 0.80 0.0 to 100.0
SAT 66.2 0.0 to 100.0
HD 5.4
LUM 0.0 to 100.0
SD 8.5
HD 3.5
HUE 0.0 to 359.5
SD 7.5 7-6
COLOR SELECT SELECT, ENTRY
TYPE OFF OFF, SQU, SAW, RIP
MODE HOR HOR, VER, H+V
-1.0 ~ 150.0 (WIPE Ver7.0 or higher)
SOFT 0.0 0.0 to 150.0
AMP 1 1 to 8
FREQ 1 1 to 8
POS 0.0 0.0 to 100.0

13
1-10. DSK menu
■DSK menu
Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
DSK(MASK) button
KEY SOURCE1 TYPE INPUT INVERT INIT
KEY SOURCE2 GAIN CLIP TRANSP
KEY INSERT TYPE INPUT FAM
KEY TRANS RATE LIMIT LEVEL
INSERT MATT SAT LUM HUE COLOR
SHIFT+DSK(MASK) button
MASK TYPE TYPE INVERT
TOP/BOTTOM TOP BOTTOM T/B
LEFT/RIGHT LEFT RIGHT L/R
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
TYPE BUS BUS, LUM 11-1
INPUT IN01 Signal name 11-2
INVERT OFF OFF, ON 11-3
INIT OFF OFF, MASK, ALL
GAIN 1.1 0.0 to 27.0 11-4-3
CLIP 6.2 0.0 to 100.0 11-4-4
TRANSP 0.0 0.0 to 100.0 11-4-1
TYPE BUS BUS, MATT 11-1
INPU 11-2
TYPE=BUS IN01 Signal name 11-3
T
FAM OFF OFF, ON 11-4-2
RATE 30 0 to 999 7-4-3
LIMIT OFF OFF, ON
7-4-1
LEVEL 100.0 0.0 to 100.0
SAT 66.2 0.0 to 100.0
HD 5.4
LUM 0.0 to 100.0
SD 8.5 11-3-1
HD 3.5
HUE 0.0 to 359.5
SD 7.5
COLOR SELECT SELECT, ENTRY 5-2
SHIFT+DSK(MASK) button
TYPE OFF OFF, BOX_A, BOX_O
INVERT OFF OFF, ON
HD 1080: 0 to 540, 720:0 to 360
4:3, SQUEEZ 0 to 242
TOP NTSC 0
LETTER 0 to 180
PAL 4:3, SQUEEZ 0 to 287
HD 1080: 0 to 540, 720:0 to 360
11-5
4:3, SQUEEZ 0 to 242
BOTTOM NTSC 0
LETTER 0 to 180
PAL 4:3, SQUEEZ 0 to 287
HD 1080: 0 to 1920, 720:0 to 1280
LEFT 0
SD 0 to 720
HD 1080: 0 to 1920, 720:0 to 1280
RIGHT 0
SD 0 to 720

14
1-11. KEY1 and KEY2 menu
■KEY1 menu * KEY2 has the same menu configuration as KEY1.
Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
KEY1(MASK) button
KEY SOURCE1 TYPE INPUT INVERT INIT
KEY SOURCE2 GAIN CLIP TRANSP
KEY INSERT TYPE INPUT FAM
KEY TRANS RATE LIMIT LEVEL
INSERT MATT SAT LUM HUE COLOR
AUTO-CK button in the joystick section (Double-clicking the button after TYPE in the KEY SOURCE line set to
CHR.)
AUTO-CK POS X POS Y SELECT
CK-TYPE PGM CURSOR
CK-EDGE POS LEFT RIGHT
MENU ADJUST CLIP GAIN HUE
SUPPRESSION Y-LV C1-LV C2-LV COL CAN
ANGLE ANGLE Y-LV C-LV K-LV
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
TYPE BUS BUS, LUM, CHR 11-1
INPUT IN01 Signal name 11-2
INVERT OFF OFF, ON 11-3
INIT OFF OFF, MASK, EDGE, SHADOW, CK, ALL
GAIN 1.0 0.0 to 27.0 11-4-3
CLIP 50 0.0 to 100.0 11-4-4
TRANSP 0.0 0.0 to 100.0 11-4-1
TYPE BUS BUS, MATT 11-1
TYPE= 11-2
INPUT IN01 Signal name 11-3
BUS
FAM OFF OFF, ON 11-4-2
RATE 30 0 to 999 7-4-3
LIMIT OFF OFF, ON
7-4-1
LEVEL 100.0 0.0 to 100.0
SAT 66.2 0.0 to 100.0
HD 5.4
LUM 0.0 to 100.0
SD 8.5 11-3-1
HD 3.5
HUE 0.0 to 359.5
SD 7.5
COLOR SELECT SELECT, ENTRY 5-2
AUTO-CK button in the joystick section (Double-clicking the button after TYPE in the KEY SOURCE line set to
CHR.)
1080 -960 to 960
HD ---
POS X 720 -640 to 640
SD --- -360 to 360
1080 -540 to 540
HD ---
720 -360 to 360
POS Y 4:3, SQUEEZ --- -243 to 243
NTSC 12-2-1
LETTER --- -176 to 176
PAL 4:3, SQUEEZ --- -288 to 288
SELECT OFF OFF, ON
PGM OFF OFF, ON
HD 8*8 8*8
CURSOR
SD 4*4 4*4
CLIP 0 0.0-100.0 12-2-2
POS 0 -3 to 3

15
LEFT 0 0 to 3
RIGHT 0 0 to 3
CLIP
GAIN 1.00 0.00-63.99
HUE 0 0.0 to 359.9
Y-LV 0.00 0.00 to 31.99
C1-LV 1.00 0.00 to 31.99
C2-LV 1.00 0.0 to 100.0
COL CAN ON ON, OFF
ANGLE 45.00 5.00 to 90.00
Y-LV 0.00 -45.00 to 45.00
C-LV 0.00 -45.00 to 45.00
K-LV 0.00 -45.00 to 45.00

■KEY1 - MASK menu SHIFT + KEY1(MASK) button *MASK2 has the same menu configuration as MASK1.
Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
MASK TYPE TYPE INVERT
TOP/BOTTOM TOP BOTTOM T/B
LEFT/RIGHT LEFT RIGHT L/R
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
TYPE OFF OFF, BOX_A, BOX_O, DSK_A, DSK_O
INVERT OFF OFF, ON
HD 1080: 0 to 540,720:0 to 360
4:3, SQUEEZ 0 to 242
TOP NTSC 0
LETTER 0 to 180
PAL 4:3, SQUEEZ 0 to 287
HD 1080: 0 to 540, 720:0 to 360
11-5
4:3, SQUEEZ 0 to 242
BOTTOM NTSC 0
LETTER 0 to 180
PAL 4:3, SQUEEZ 0 to 287
HD 1080: to 1920, 720:0 to 1280
LEFT 0
SD 0 to 720
HD 1080:o 1920, 720:0 to 1280
RIGHT 0
SD 0 to 720

■KEY1 - EDGE menu EDGE1(SHADOW1) button *EDGE2 has the same menu configuration as EDGE1.
Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
EDGE STS TYPE WIDTH SOFT TRANSP
EDGE POS POS-X POS-Y
EDGE COLOR SAT LUM HUE COLOR
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
TYPE OFF OFF, NORMAL, O_LINE
WIDTH 1 0.0 to 8.0 (OPT1,2/Ver7.0 or higer)
SOFT 0 0 to 15
TRANSP 0.0 0.0 to 100.0
POS-X 0 -12~12 (OPT1,2/Ver7.0 or higer)
POS-Y 0 -6~6 (OPT1,2/Ver7.0 or higer) 11-6
SAT 66.2 0.0 to 100.0
HD 5.4
LUM 0.0 to 100.0
SD 8.5
HD 3.5
HUE 0.0 to 359.5
SD 7.5
COLOR SELECT SELECT, ENTRY 5-2

16
SHIFT + EDGE1(SHADOW1) button
■KEY1 - SHADOW menu *SHADOW2 has the same menu configuration as SHADOW1.
Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
SHADOW POS X POS Y SELECT
SHADOW STS SOFT TRANSP
SHADOW COL SAT LUM HUE COLOR
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
1080 -960 to 960
POS HD
X 720 10 -640 to 640
NTSC, PAL -360 to 360
1080 -540 to 540
HD
POS 720 -360 to 360
10
Y NTSC -254 to 254
PAL -288 to 288
SELECT OFF ON/OFF 11-6
SOFT 0 0 to 15
TRANSP 0.0 0.0 to 100.0
SAT 66.2 0.0 to 100.0
HD 5.4
LUM 0.0 to 100.0
SD 8.5
HD 3.5
HUE 0.0 to 359.5
SD 7.5
COLOR SELECT SELECT, ENTRY 5-2

17
1-12. DVE MODIFY menu
■DVE menu
Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
DVE(FREEZE) button
UPAT
DVE-MODI SELECT CHANNEL INIT
STORE
DVE STILL STORE BACK IMG
DVE POS POS-X POS-Y SIZE-XY
SIZE SIZE-X SIZE-Y
LOCAL POS LPOS-X LPOS-Y LPOS-Z
LOCAL ROT LROT-X LROT-Y LROT-Z
GLOBAL POS GPOS-X GPOS-Y LPOS-Z
GLOBAL ROT GROT-X GROT-Y GROT-Z
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
SELECT 100 100 to 219, 401 to 450 7-5
CHANNEL PGM PGM, PST, KEY1, KEY2
UPAT STORE OFF OFF, 401-450
OFF, POS, ROT, CROP, WARP, BORDER,
INIT OFF 7-7-2
SHDW, SUBEFF, HILITE, ALL
STORE
9-4-2
BACK IMAGE OFF OFF, ON
DVE POS X 0 -7999 to 7999
DVE POS Y 0 -7999 to 7999
SIZE X-Y 0 0 to 7999
SIZE X 0 0 to 7999
SIZE Y 0 0 to 7999
LOCAL POS X 0 -7999 to 7999
LOCAL POS Y 0 -7999 to 7999
LOCAL POS Z 0 -7999 to 7999
LOCAL ROT X 0_0 -7_999 to 7_999 (*1) 9-4-1
LOCAL ROT Y 0_0 -7_999 to 7_999 (*1)
LOCAL ROT Z 0_0 -7_999 to 7_999 (*1)
GLOBAL POS X 0 -7999 to 7999
GLOBAL POS Y 0 -7999 to 7999
GLOBAL POS Z 0 -7999 to 7999
GLOBAL ROT X 0_0 -7_999 to 7_999 (*1)
GLOBAL ROT Y 0_0 -7_999 to 7_999 (*1)
GLOBAL ROT Z 0_0 -7_999 to 7_999 (*1)
(*1) When ROT STEP in the SETUP-DVE SETUP menu is set to 1000.

■DVE-CROP menu
Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
CROP(TRAIL) button
CROP ENABLE ALL
CROP POS TOP BOTTOM LEFT RIGHT
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
ENABLE ON OFF, ON
ALL 0.0 0.0 to 100.0
TOP 0.0 0.0 to 100.0
9-4-4
BOTTOM 0.0 0.0 to 100.0
LEFT 0.0 0.0 to 100.0
RIGHT 0.0 0.0 to 100.0

18
■DVE-WARP- menu WARP(BORDER) button
Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
WARP1 TYPE LEVEL * *
WARP2 * * * *
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
PGTURN, HZTURN, VZTURN, QDTURN,
PGROLL, HZROLL, VZROLL, QDROLL,
WAVE, ACCORD, SPLIT,. XSPLIT,
TYPE OFF BURST, STREAM, SW WIN, RIPPLE,
LENS, SPHERE, SCREW1to 4,
STRM1 to 12, MULTI, PIZZA , BEVEL,
W DROP
LEVEL (Varies by type) (Varies by type)
X OFF OFF, -7999 to 7999
* QUAD
Y OFF OFF, -7999 to 7999
* DIR 0 -7999 to 7999 9-4-5
* RAD 0 0 to 7999
* ROLL 0 -7999 to 7999
* GAP SIZE 0 -8000 to 1000
X 0 -1000 to 1000
* SIDE1
Y 0 -1000 to 1000
X 0 -1000 to 1000
* SIDE2
Y 0 -1000 to 1000
SIDE BD OFF OFF, ON (Only for PIZZA BOX)
* Note that the available setting parameters and setting ranges vary depending on the WARP type. Only the
required parameters are displayed in the menu when the WARP type is selected.

■DVE-SUB EFF menu SUB EFF(MOSAIC) button


Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
DEFOCUS H-LV V-LV H/V-LV SELECT
PAINT Y-LV C-LV Y/C-LV MOSAIC
MONO-COLOR SAT HUE SELECT
FADE/PERSP FADE LV PERSP
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
H-LV 0.0 0.0~100.0
V-LV 0.0 0.0~100.0
H/V-LV 0.0 0.0~100.0
SELECT OFF OFF, ON
9-4-8
Y-LV 0 0 to 31
C-LV 0 0 to 31
Y/C-LV 0 0 to 31
MOSAIC OFF OFF, 1 to 15
SHIFT+SUB EFF(MOSAIC) button
SAT 0.0 0.0 to 100.0
HUE 0_000 -7_359 to 7_359 9-4-8
ENABLE SELECT OFF OFF, ON
FADE LV 0.0 0.0~100.0
PERSP 100.0 0.0~799.9 9-4-3

19
■DVE-BORDER menu SHIFT+WARP(BORDER) button
Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
BORDER-IN WID-X WID-Y WID-X/Y ENABLE
BORDER-OUT WID-X WID-Y WID-X/Y ENABLE
SOFT EDGE BDR-X BDR-Y BDR-X/Y EDGE
BRDR COLOR SAT LUM HUE

Parameter Default Setting Range Reference


WID-X 0.0 0.0 to 100.0
WID-Y 0.0 0.0 to 100.0
WID-XY 0.0 0.0 to 100.0
ENABLE OFF OFF, ON
WID-X 0.0 0.0 to 20.0
WID-Y 0.0 0.0 to 20.0
WID-XY 0.0 0.0 to 20.0
ENABLE OFF OFF, ON 9-4-6
BDR-X OFF OFF, 1 to 15
BDR-Y OFF OFF, 1 to 15
BDR-X/Y OFF OFF, 1 to 15
EDGE OFF OFF, 1 to 15
SAT 0.0 0.0 to 100.0
LUM 100.0 0.0 to 100.0
HUE 0_000 -7_359 to 7_359

■DVE-TRAIL menu SHIFT+WARP(BORDER) button


Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
TRAIL TYPE LENGTH SHD-SOFT
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
TYPE OFF OFF, DECAY, STAR, B-DECAY, B-STAR
LENGTH 1 1 to 6 9-4-7
SHD-SOFT 0 0 to 3

■DVE-SHADOW menu SHADOW(HILITE) button


Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
SHADOW POS-X POS-Y LEVEL SELECT
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
POS-X 0 -100~100
HD 0 -12~12
POS-Y
SD 0 -6~6 9-4-7
LEVEL 1 1~13
SELECT OFF OFF, ON

20
■HILITE menu SHIFT + SHADOW(HILITE) button
Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
HILITE POS WIDTH BAR ROT TYPE
HLT COLOR SAT LUM HUE
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
POS 0.0 -100.0~100.0
FLAT 0.0 0.0~100.0
WIDTH
BAR 0.0 0.0~100.0
BAR ROT 0 -7999~7999
SPOT RAD 0 0~1000 9-4-9
TYPE OFF OFF, FLAT, BAR, SPOT, AUTO
SAT 0.0 0.0~100.0
LUM 50.0 0.0~100.0
HUE 0_000 -7_359~7_359

■DVE-FREEZE menu SHIFT+DVE(FREEZE) button


Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
FREEZE FREEZE STRB NEGA
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
FREEZE OFF OFF, FIELD, FRAME
STROBE OFF OFF, 1 to 100 9-4-8
NEGA OFF OFF

21
1-13. USER PATTERN menu
■USER PATTERN menu USER(SEQ) button
Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
PAT CTRL SELECT PROTECT DELETE PREV
KF EDIT CH SEL KF SEL KF DUR INTERP
DUAL PATT PRIORITY
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
SELECT 0 0, 1 to 50
PROTECT OFF OFF, ON
DELETE OFF OFF, ON
PREV
CH SEL CH1 CH1, CH2 8
KF SEL 1 1 to 50
KF DUR 0 0 to 999
INTERP LINE SMOOTH, LINE. CUT
PRIORITY 0 0 ~ 100

1-14. SEQUENCE menu


■SEQUENCE menu SHIFT+USER(SEQ) button
Sub menu Parameter line Parameter
(Turn F1 to move between.) (Turn F2) (Turn F3) (Turn F4) (Turn F5)
SEQ SET NUMBER PROTECT DELETE
INTERP BKGD KEY1 KEY2 DSK
PLAY STS LOOP LINK DIR TOTAL DUR
STEP STS SELECT DUR BREAK
XPT ENABLE1 BKGD KEY1 KEY2 DSK
XPT ENABLE2 EFF BKGD
CTRL ENABLE1 BKGD KEY1 KEY2 DSK
CTRL ENABLE2 BLACK
CC ENABLE CH1 CH2 KEY1 KEY2
Parameter Default Setting Range Reference
NUMBER 0 OFF, 1 ~ 20
PROTECT OFF OFF, ON
INTERP (BKGD,
KEY1, KEY2, DSK, CUT CUT, LINE, SMOOTH
EFF BKGD)
LOOP OFF OFF, ON
LINK OFF OFF, ON
DIR NORMAL NORMAL, REVERSE
TOTAL DUR Total keyframe durations 0 ~ 49950
SELECT 0/0 0/0 to 50/50
16
DUR 30 0 to 999
BREAK OFF OFF, ON
XPT ENABLE
(BKGD, KEY1, KEY2, OFF OFF, ON
DSK, EFF BKGD)
CTRL ENABLE1
(BKGD, KEY1, KEY2, OFF OFF, ON
DSK, BLACK)
CC ENABLE1
(CH1, CH2, KEY1, OFF OFF, ON
KEY2)

22
Appendix 2. Available File List
The following file formats can be saved / loaded to / from CF Card
File Format File Name File Data Description
MU and OU system data,
all DATA.all User default data,
All WIPE data and all event memory data.
sys HVS-1000.sys MU and OU system data
mem EVENT.mem All event memory data
u* WIPE.u01 to 50 User Pattern data
p* SEQUENCE.p01 to p20 Sequence data
*.jpg JPEG format files (standard RGB)
STILL1.jpg Still 1 capture video
jpg(*1) STILL2.jpg Still 2 capture video
STILL3.jpg Still 3 capture video
STILL4.jpg Still 4 capture video
*.tga TARGA format files (uncompressed RGB)
STILL1.tga Still 1 capture video
tga(*1) STILL2.tga Still 2 capture video
STILL3.tga Still 3 capture video
STILL4.tga Still 4 capture video

File Format File Name File Data Description


mmu pm7837XX.mmu HVS-1000HS MU software main upgrade data
smu pm7758XX.smu HVS-1000HS MU software sub upgrade data
eou pm7796XX.eou HVS-1000EOU software upgrade data
gcp pmXXXXX.gcp CPU firmware upgrade data for DVE card
gds pmXXXXX.gds DSP firmware upgrade data for DVE card
gf1 pmXXXXX.gf1 DVE firmware upgrade data 1
gf2 pmXXXXX.gf2 DVE firmware upgrade data 2
gf3 pmXXXXX.gf3 DVE firmware upgrade data 3

Available CF Cards
HITACHI HB Series HB28B064C8C 64MB
I/O DATA CFS Series CFS-128M 128MB
BUFFALO RCF-X Series RCF-X64MY 64MB
HAGIWARA V Series HPC-CF256V 256MB

23
Appendix 3. WIPE Pattern List

000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009

010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019

020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029

030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039

040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049

050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059

060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069

070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079

080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089

090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099

24
Appendix 4. DVE Pattern List
Normal Pattern (options are shaded)

100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109

110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119

120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129

130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139

140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149

150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159

160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169

170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179

180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189

190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199

200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209

210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219

25
Reverse Pattern (options are shaded)

100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109

110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119

120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129

130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139

140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149

150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159

160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169

170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179

180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189

190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199

200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209

210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219

26
Appendix 5. User Preset Patterns (50 patterns)

401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410

411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420

421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430

431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440

441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450

27
Warning
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and,
if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in
which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own
expense.
01/23/2006 Printed in Japan

FOR-A COMPANY LIMITED


Head Office : 3-8-1 Ebisu, Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 150-0013, Japan
Overseas Division Phone: +81 (0)3-3446-3936, Fax: +81 (0)3-3446-1470
Japan Branch Offices : Osaka/Fukuoka/Hiroshima/Nagoya/Sendai/Sapporo
R&D/Production : Sakura Center/Sapporo Center/Florida Center/Los Angeles Center

FOR-A America Corporate Office


11125 Knott Ave., Suite #A, Cypress, CA 90630, U.S.A.
Phone : +1 714-894-3311 Fax : +1 714-894-5399

FOR-A America East Coast Office


1065 Avenue of the Americas Suite #1701A New York,NY 10018, U.S.A.
Phone : +1 212-861-2758 Fax : +1 212-861-2793

FOR-A America Distribution & Service Center


2400 N.E. Waldo Road, Gainesville, FL 32609, U.S.A.
Phone: +1 352-371-1505 Fax : +1 352-378-5320

FOR-A Corporation of Canada


425 Queen St. W. #210, Toronto, Ontario M5V 2A5, CANADA
Phone: +1 416-977-0343 Fax : +1 416-977-0657

FOR-A UK Limited
UNIT C71, Barwell Business Park, Leatherhead Road, Chessington Surrey, KT9 2NY, U.K.
Phone: +44 (0)20-8391-7979 Fax : +44 (0)20-8391-7978

FOR-A Italia S.r.l.


Viale Europa 50 20093, Cologno Monzese (MI), Milan, ITALY
Phone: +39 02-254-3635/6 Fax : +39 02-254-0477

FOR-A Corporation of Korea


801 Dangsan Bld., 53-1 Dangsan-Dong, Youngdeungpo-Gu, Seoul 150-800, Korea
Phone: +82 (0)2-2637-0761 Fax : +82 (0)2-2637-0760

*The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.

You might also like